Ricoh All in One Printer FAX5600L User Guide

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

RICOH FAX5600L

Please read all of these instructions and keep this manual by your machine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,

if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause

harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a

residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user

will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

^✬CAUTION: Use of control or adjustments or performance of procedures

other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Class A

This Digital Apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for Radio noise

emissions from Digital Apparatus as set out in the Interference-causing

equipment entitled "Digital Apparatus", ICES-003 of the Department of

Communications.

Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques

applicables aux appareils numériques de classe A prescrites dans la norme

sur le matériel brouilleur : "Appareils Numériques", NMB-003 édictée par le

ministre des Communications.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notice about the Telephone Consumer Protection Act (Valid in the USA only)

Attention please!

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 among other things makes it

unlawful for any person to send any message via a telephone fax machine

unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each

transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it

is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual

sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or

such business, other entity, or individual. This information is transmitted with

your document by the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification) feature.

In order for you to meet the requirement, your machine must be programmed

by following the instructions in the accompanying Operation Manual. In

particular, please refer to the "Getting Started" and/or "Programming" sections.

Also refer to the TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification) programming procedure

to enter the business identification and telephone number of the terminal or

business. Do not forget to set the date and time.

Thank you

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read all of these instructions.

2. Save these instructions for later use.

3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.

4. Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid

cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

5. Do not use this product near water.

6. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product

may fall, causing serious damage to the product or injuring the user.

7. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for

ventilation; to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from

overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other

similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation

unless proper ventilation is provided.

8. This product should be operated from the type of power source indicated on

the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult

an authorized sales person or your local power company.

9. This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug, a plug having a

third (grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet.

This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet,

contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the

purpose of the grounding type plug. (This does not apply in countries in which

the 2-wire, non-grounded type of plug is used.)

10. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product

where persons will walk on the cord.

11. If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total of the

ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension cord do not

exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total of all

products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed 15 amperes.

12. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they

may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a

risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

13. Do not attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers

may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks. Refer all servicing

to qualified service personnel.

14. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service

personnel under the following conditions:

A. When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

B. If liquid has been spilled into the product.

C. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

D. If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions

are followed. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating

instructions since improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often required extensive work by a qualified technician

to restore the product to normal operation.

E. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

F. If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a

need for service.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTENTS

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

WHAT DOES A FAX MACHINE DO?

TELEPHONE LINE PROBLEMS AFFECT FAX COMMUNICATION

SOME OF THE THINGS THAT THIS MACHINE CAN DO

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

MANUAL OVERVIEW

CONVENTIONS

STORING TELEPHONE NUMBERS

STORING NAMES AND LABELS

IF YOU MAKE A MISTAKE

ON/OFF SWITCHES AND USER PARAMETERS

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

POWER AND GROUNDING

COLD WEATHER POWER-UP

THUNDERSTORMS

COPY PAPER

TONER CARTRIDGES

OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

GENERAL

GUIDE TO COMPONENTS

COMPONENT DIAGRAM

OPERATION PANEL

OPERATION PANEL DIAGRAM

INSTALLING THE MACHINE

LOCATION

CONNECTING THE MACHINE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

SOME ITEMS MUST BE PROGRAMMED FIRST

Overview

Language Selection

Date and Time

Daylight Saving Time

Terminal Identification

RTI (Remote Terminal Identification)

TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)

CSI (Called Subscriber Identification)

Telephone Line Type

QUICK DIAL, SPEED DIAL, AND GROUP DIAL

Three Convenient Ways to Dial

Quick Dial and Speed Dial

Groups

Programming Quick Dial

Programming a New Quick Dial

Editing a Quick Dial

Erasing a Quick Dial

Programming Speed Dials

Programming a New Speed Dial

Editing a Speed Dial

Erasing a Speed Dial

Programming Groups

Entering Group Programming Mode and Selecting a Group

Storing Numbers in a Group

Checking Which Numbers are Already in the Group

Storing a Label for this Group

Storing a Group Transfer Station

Erasing the Group

Limits on the Use of Stored Telephone Numbers

DEALING WITH JUNK FAX MAIL

OTHER ITEMS TO PROGRAM AT YOUR LEISURE

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Precautions Concerning Unacceptable Document Types

Transmission Procedure at a Glance

Overview

Immediate Transmission

Memory Transmission

Sending to Just One Location

Sending to More Than One Location (Broadcasting)

Check your Destinations Before Dialing

Possible Problems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contrast, Resolution, and Halftone Modes

Contrast

Resolution

Halftone

Selecting the Halftone Type

Home Position Setting Adjustments

Dialing with the Telephone Directory

Optional Features for Transmission

Personal Code

Send Later

Transmission Deadline (TRD)

Page Count (Immediate Transmission only)

Auto Reduce

On/Off Selection Switch

Auto Reduce Home Position Adjustment

TTI

ID Transmission

Economy Transmission

On/Off Selection Switch

Storing the Economy Transmission Time

Voice Request (This feature requires a handset)

Direct Fax Number Entry

Immediate Transmission

Procedure

Converting Immediate Transmission to Memory Transmission

Transmission Mode Home Position Adjustment

Using the Stamp

Changing the Stamp On/Off Home Position Setting

Redialing

Automatic Redialing

Using the AI (Artificial Intelligence) Redial Key

RECEIVING FAX MESSAGES

Selecting the Reception Mode

Manual Receive Mode

Auto Receive Mode

Substitute Reception

Overview

Switching Substitute Reception On or Off

TELEPHONE CALLS

Making a Telephone Call

Using On Hook Dial

Using the Handset

Using AI Redial

Answering the Telephone

Phoning and Faxing on the Same Call

To Talk Before Sending a Fax (On Hook Dial)

To Talk After Sending a Fax

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Speaker and Buzzer Volume Adjustments

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

Overview

What Networking Features Does This Machine Have?

Preparing the Machine for Networking Operations

Storing the Country Code

Storing your Machine’s Own Telephone Number

Storing your Area Code Prefix

Storing the ID Code

Groups

Transfer Request

Combining Transfer Request with Broadcasting

Two-step Transfer

Digital Link

Analog Link

Multi-step Transfer

Your Machine as a Transfer Station

(Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Transfer Request by Tonal Signals

Setting the Machine up for Transfer Request by Tonal Signals

Storing the Remote ID

Switching Transfer Request by Tonal Signals On/Off

Procedure for Transfer Request by Tonal Signals

Full Procedure

Example Procedure (for Quick Reference)

Beep Tones

TRANSMISSION

Keystroke Programs

Overview

Storing a Keystroke Program

Labeling a Program

Using a Program

Transmission Program

Free Polling Reception Program

Erasing a Program

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

Confidential Transmission

Overview

Procedure

Confidential ID Override Option

Auto Document

Overview

Storing an Auto Document

Labeling an Auto Document

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using an Auto Document

Printing the Contents of an Auto Document

Erasing an Auto Document

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

136

Restricting Access to the Machine

Overview

Programming the Personal Codes

Storing a Personal Code

Editing or Erasing a Personal Code

Switching on Restricted Access

Operating the Machine with Restricted Access Switched On

Tonal Signals

Chain Dialing

Secure Transmission

Overview

Changing the Secure Transmission On/Off Home Position Setting

Making a Secure Transmission

Specified Image Area

Overview

Changing the Specified Image Area On/Off Home Position Setting

Specifying an Image Area

Label Insertion

Closed Network (Transmission)

Protection Against Wrong Connections

ECM (Error Correction Mode) and Page Retransmission

Batch Transmission

Overview

Changing the Batch Transmission On/Off Home Position Setting

Well Log Transmission

RECEPTION

Confidential Reception (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Overview

Storing a Confidential ID

Printing a Confidential Fax Message

Confidential File Report

Memory Lock (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Overview

Storing a Memory Lock ID

Switching Memory Lock On/Off

Printing from Memory Lock (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Rejection of Messages from Unidentified Senders

Authorized Reception

Overview

Programming the Authorized Senders

Switching Authorized Reception On/Off

Forwarding (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Overview

Programming the Forwarding Feature

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing the Forwarding Feature

Switching Forwarding On/Off

138

140

141

142

143

144

145

Enabling and Disabling the Forwarding Mark

Specified Cassette Selection (Optional Paper Feed Unit Required)

Overview

Programming the Specified Cassette Selection Feature

Switching Specified Cassette Selection On/Off

Wild Cards

Reverse Order Printing (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Multi-sort Document Reception (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required) 146

Center Mark

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

170

171

172

Checkered Mark

Reception Time

Length Reduction

Two in One

Closed Network (Reception)

OTHER

Polling

Overview

Polling Transmission

Free Polling

Secured Polling

Stored ID Override

Polling Reception

Operating Procedure

Stored ID Override Option

Continuous Polling Reception

File Management

File Retention Time and File Retransmission

File Retransmission

Erasing a File from Memory

Printing a File

User Function Keys

User Function Codes

Function Programs

Storing a Function Program

Using a Function Program

Deleting a Function Program

OMR Sheets

Introduction

Using an OMR Sheet

Completing an OMR Sheet

The Five Types of OMR Sheets

User Parameter Program Sheet

Quick/Speed Dial Program Sheet

Group Program Sheet

Transmission Program Sheet

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transfer Request Program Sheet

Procedures

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

To Print an OMR Sheet

Using an OMR Sheet to Send a Fax Message

Using an OMR Sheet to Program the Machine

Errors

Power Saver

Overview

Programming Procedure

Switching the Power Saver On or Off

Counters

Communication Result Display

Entering PC Printer Mode (Printer Interface Required)

Selecting the Paper Feed Cassette for Printer Mode

(Printer Interface and Paper Feed Unit Required)

Copying

180

181

182

183

184

Dual Access

Inch-to-millimeter Conversion

RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)

Overview

Switching RDS On/Off

Short Preamble

AI Short Protocol

REPORTS

AUTOMATICALLY PRINTED REPORTS

Descriptions of the Available Reports

TCR (Transmission Confirmation Report)

Transmission Result Report

Error Report

185

186

187

188

189

191

Communication Failure Report

Memory Storage Report

Power Failure Report

Transfer Result Report

Polling Reserve Report

Polling Result Report

Polling Clear Report

Confidential File Report (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Transmission Deadline Report/Polling Confirmation List

Switching Reports On/Off

Printing a Sample of Data on the Reports

Report Formats

USER-INITIATED REPORTS

Descriptions of Available Reports

TCR

File List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quick Dial List

Speed Dial List

Group Dial List

Program List

User Function List

Personal Code List

Authorized Reception List

Forwarding List

Specified Cassette Selection List

User Parameter List

192

193

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

REPLACING PAPER

REPLACING THE TONER CASSETTE

Replacement Procedure

194

195

197

198

199

200

202

203

204

208

212

Ordering Toner

Switching the Ordering Toner Feature On/Off

Ordering Toner Procedure

REPLACING THE STAMP

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE OF THE CASSETTE

Upper Cassette

Lower Cassette(s)

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

User Maintenance Table

User Maintenance Procedure

Scanner

Main Body

Lower Paper Feed Unit(s) (If one or more are installed)

SOLVING PROBLEMS

DOCUMENT JAMS

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

223

225

227

228

Clearing a Document Jam

Adjusting the Document Feeder

COPY JAMS

Cassette Entrance

Inside the Machine

Copy Feed-out Area

Lower Cassette Entrance

COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS

OPERATING DIFFICULTIES

DISPLAYED ERROR MESSAGES

ERROR CODES

CALLING THE SERVICE STATION (SERVICE REPORT TRANSMISSION)

Switching Service Report Transmission On/Off

Sending a Service Report

DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

229

APPENDIX

APPENDIX A. PAPER FEED UNIT

Operation

Maintenance

Copy Jams

APPENDIX B. FAX MEMORY TYPE 90 40 MB HD

General

230

231

232

233

234

235

236

237

238

240

241

242

243

Operation

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Introduction

Setting up the Group 4 Interface

Subaddress Key

Own ISDN-G4 Number

Own ISDN-G3 Number

Next Transfer Station

Operation

Dialing and Storing Telephone Numbers

Overview

Transmission Procedure

Storing a Telephone Number

Automatic Fallback from Group 4 Mode to Group 3 Mode

Terminal ID

Explanation of the Items in the Group 4 Identifier

Transmitter and Receiver Terminal IDs

Date and Time

Page Number

Switching the Command Information Line On/Off

Terminal ID Verification

Troubleshooting

Call Progress Signals (CPS)

GLOSSARY

244

INDEX

OFFICIAL NOTICE TO USERS

FUNCTION LIST

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing this product. This multi-function office machine offers a

wide range of fax, printer, and convenience features.

WHAT DOES A FAX MACHINE DO?

When you write a letter, you normally seal it in an envelope, attach a stamp, and post it in the

nearest mail box. Then, in a few days, depending on the postal service, the letter will arrive at its

destination. However, you may not be aware of its arrival until you get a return letter.

A fax machine speeds up this process. After you have written your letter, place it face down in your

fax machine’s document feeder, dial the destination’s fax number, then press the Start key.

The fax machine scans your letter, and converts it into a series of black and white dots (the

number of dots that there are across and down the page depends on the resolution that you

selected; refer to the specifications section of this manual for details). This series of dots is

transformed into an electrical signal and sent out over the telephone line to the destination fax

machine.

The receiving fax machine reconstructs your letter from the incoming signal, and prints it.

If you are worried about whether the message arrived at the destination, you can check a report

called the TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report). When you print this report, you will see the

results of the most recent fax communications made by your machine.

You can use your fax machine to send and receive many types of document, even photographs.

TELEPHONE LINE PROBLEMS AFFECT FAX COMMUNICATION

Quick and accurate transmission of fax messages depends

on the condition of the telephone line. If the line condition is

very good, this machine will transmit a letter-size page in

about 6 seconds. However, if the line is noisy, the speed

Errors

may be reduced significantly, and the data may be

damaged.

The symptoms of data loss caused by a noisy telephone

line are seen on the printouts of received messages. An

example is shown opposite. Note that lines are missing

Transmit

from the page at the indicated locations. ECM (Error

Correction Mode) is an effective countermeasure against

this type of error; you have the choice of having the ECM

Document

Received

Message

feature switched on or off. It is switched on before the

machine leaves the factory. (Refer to page 123 for more

information about ECM).

The line condition is affected by the weather;

thunderstorms can cause electrical noise on telephone lines.

In addition, the operation of the equipment in the

telephone company’s control office can also cause noise

on the line.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

SOME OF THE THINGS THAT THIS MACHINE CAN DO

This machine has many features. Here is a sample of what the machine can do.

Sending a Fax to More Than One Location

Network Features, including Transfer Request

See page 51.

See page 81.

Restricting Access to the Machine

Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group Dial

See page 110.

See page 29.

Sending a Fax Later

Confidential Communication

See pages 104 and 126.

See page 60.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTRODUCTION

Keystroke Programs

User Function Keys

See page 163.

See page 99.

Auto Document (sends a commonly

transmitted page with one touch)

Authorized Reception (cuts out junk fax mail)

See page 106.

Forwarding

See page 132.

Batch Transmission

See page 124.

See page 134.

Protection against Wrong Connections

Transmission Deadline

See page 122.

See page 61.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

MANUAL OVERVIEW

Your facsimile machine is equipped with a wide range of labor-saving and

cost-saving features. This manual explains each of these features, and how you

can put them to use. Note that the external appearance of the machine in some

illustrations may be slightly different from the actual machine.

The manual consists of the following sections.

❐ How to Use this Manual - This is the section that you are now reading. It

contains an overview of the manual and the conventions used by the authors. It

also contains quick reference sections on how to input telephone numbers and

names, and how to correct errors that you may inadvertently make when

operating the machine.

❐ General Precautions - This section lists precautions that you should keep in

mind when operating the machine. Read this section before you begin to use

your machine.

❐ Guide to Components - This contains a diagram that shows where the main

components of your machine are situated.

❐ Operation Panel - This describes the functions of the various buttons and

indicators that are on your machine’s operation panel.

❐ Installing the Machine - If you are setting up your machine for the first time, a

service technician will do the physical installation, so that is not described here.

However, this section tells you the best type of place to install your machine.

So, please refer to it when you plan to move the machine to another location.

❐ Before you Send your First Fax - This section explains the things that you

have to do before you can send your first fax message and lists important

features that will make faxing more convenient.

❐ Routine Operation - This section describes the features and settings that you

will normally be using every day.

❐ Advanced Features - This section explains how to take advantage of the

special features of your fax machine, including how to set up networks for

economical distribution of fax messages over long distances.

❐ Reports - This section explains the reports that the machine generates.

❐ Looking After the Machine - This section shows you what to do when

consumable supplies run out. The user maintenance procedure in this section

should be done every six months if you want to keep your machine in top

condition.

❐ Solving Problems - If your machine cannot communicate, or if it generates

error codes or experiences paper jams, refer to this section. Many routine

problems do not need to be solved by an experienced technician.

❐ Specifications - This is a list of technical data you might like to refer to

occasionally.

❐ Appendix - This describes the optional hard disk, paper feed unit, and ISDN

Group 4 kit. The PC Printer Interface Kit comes with a separate manual.

❐ Quick Reference Guide - This indicates how to use this machine at a glance.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

CONVENTIONS

The following conventions were used when writing this manual.

Keynames

These have been printed in a different typeface and enclosed by a box.

For example: " Start " means "Press the Start key on the operation panel".

If you see something like "

the key 3 times.

x 3", this means that you have to press

On the operation panel, there is a circular key with four arrows (up,

down, left, right) printed on it. This is the scroll key. It is often used

in the operating procedures to gain access to various features. For

example, if you see ← in the manual, you are being asked to

press the left-pointing arrow on the scroll key.

Displays

Messages seen on the display are shown in a larger box, normally on the right

hand side of the page, directly opposite the step that brought it up on the screen.

After following a step in a procedure, check the display to see if it corresponds to

the one in the manual. This may help you to check whether you are following the

procedure successfully. The following examples show three common types of

display.

Example A: The keys that can be pressed

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

are shown on the screen in small boxes. In

this example, you can press the Yes, No, or

Clear keys, or the down arrow on the scroll

key (see the arrow at the top right).

P RES S YES OR CLR

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

Example B: The choices of settings for a

feature are shown on the screen. The

current setting is highlighted (white on

black). If you press the right-pointing arrow

on the scroll key, the setting will be changed

to OFF.

YES

OP TI ON S ELECT

AUTO REDUCE

TO END

OF F

TTI

Example C: The ABC in the bottom right of

the display indicates that you can input

letters using the Quick Dial Keys, and

numbers using the ten-key pad on the

operation panel.

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

ENTER LABEL

ABC

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Most procedures start from standby mode,

that is, when the display is as shown on the

right. The value after "MEMORY" shows how

much memory space is remaining.

MEMORY TRANS .

S ET DOCUMENT

AP R. 4 . 1 2 : 2 5 P M

MEMORY 1 0 0 %

NOTE: If you start a procedure and do not enter anything at the operation panel for more than

5 minutes, the machine returns to standby mode.

Symbols

The text contains a few symbols that highlight important points or direct you

towards other parts of the manual that are related to the feature currently being

described.

indicates a hint (for example, indicating a page number where

related information can be found).

indicates that you can access the current feature by pressing a

User Function Key provided, if you have already programmed a User

Function Key to perform a particular function.

Using Function 35, you can program User Function Keys as

short cuts to access some features. (See page 163 for more about

programming the User Function Keys).

indicates that you can switch the current feature on or off using

Function 81 or Function 91. Some features must be switched on

before they will work.

indicates that you can operate this feature with an OMR Sheet as

well as from the operation panel. (See page 166 and the pages

following for full details concerning OMR Sheets.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

STORING TELEPHONE NUMBERS

To dial a telephone number or store it as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, type it into

the machine at the ten-key pad on the operation panel.

STORING NAMES AND LABELS

You can enter names using the Quick Dial Keys. Use Quick Dial Keys 01 to 26 for

the letters of the alphabet (or 33 to 58 if the quick dial label plate on the operation

panel is flipped over to the right), and use Quick Dial 30 (or 62) as a spacebar.

The letters are printed on the surface of each key. If you wish to enter a digit from

0 to 9, use the ten-key pad.

The cursor appears on the screen as a black dash below the cursor position. If

you wish to move the cursor while editing a name or number, press the

and arrows on the circular scroll key on the operation panel.

←

→

If you wish to enter a punctuation mark or symbol, use Quick Dial 31 (or 63). See

"Punctuation Marks and Symbols" on the next page for more details.

Quick Dial 32 (or 64) can be used as a Shift key, to select upper or lower case

letters.

KEY

01/33

02/34

03/35

04/36

05/37

06/38

07/39

08/40

09/41

10/42

11/43

DESCRIPTION

KEY

12/44

13/45

14/46

15/47

16/48

17/49

18/50

19/51

20/52

21/53

22/54

DESCRIPTION

KEY

23/55

24/56

25/57

26/58

27/59

28/60

29/61

30/62

31/63

DESCRIPTION

Not used

Space

Punctuation Marks

and Symbols

32/64

Shift key (see p. 8)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Punctuation Marks and Symbols

S ELECT

P 1 / 5

1 !

2 "

3 #

9 )

4 $

5 % 6 &

If you press 31 or 63 while entering a

label, a menu of symbols will appear, as

shown on the right.

7 ’ 8 (

TO CANCEL

❐ To select a symbol, press the required key on the ten-key pad. For example, if

you wish to enter a ’#’, press 3 . Then move the cursor forward with the

scroll key so that you can enter the next letter, digit, or symbol in the item that

you are typing into the display.

❐ If the symbol that you need is not on the screen, scroll through the pages of

symbols with the

↑

and ↓ keys.

Shift Key

As shown in example C on page 5, ’ABC’ can be seen in the bottom right of the

display while you are inputting a label. This indicates that upper case letters will

be stored. If you wish to input lower case letters, press 32 or 64 . The ’ABC’

will change to ’a b c ’, and the letters that you type in will be stored as lower case

letters. To change back to upper case letters, press 32 or 64 again.

IF YOU MAKE A MISTAKE

If you make a mistake when inputting a name or number, either:

❐ Press No to erase the entire name or number and start again.

❐ Press Clear to erase the last letter or digit that you entered.

If you enter the wrong function number, either:

❐ Press No then input the correct function number.

❐ Press Function to return to standby mode and start again.

If you dialed the wrong number, either:

❐ Press No . If scanning has already begun, press

Stop .

❐ If you already programmed the number into the machine by pressing Yes,

remove the document from the document feeder and start again, or use the

destination reviewing feature (option 08) to cancel that particular destination

only (see page 52).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

ON/OFF SWITCHES AND USER PARAMETERS

Some of the features in this machine can be switched on or off, and some of them

do not work unless they are switched on first. Other features can be adjusted in

various ways. Each adjustment or on/off switch is explained in the relevant

sections of the manual.

There are two user functions to help you adjust these features and switch them

on/off.

❐ Function 81 (On/Off Switches)

❐ Function 91 (User Parameters)

On/Off Switches

This feature allows you to switch some of the major features of the machine on or

off. The overall procedure is explained below. However, each of the adjustments

that can be made using this procedure are explained in the relevant parts of the

manual.

As well as a series of on/off switches, Function 81 allows access to the following

features.

❐ Telephone Line Type

DP: Pulse Dial

TT: Touch Tone

❐ Halftone Type

SPD MODE: The machine will use the Basic Halftone Process

STD MODE: The machine will use the higher quality Error Diffusion Process.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

The first displayed item is the telephone line

type: DP = Pulse Dial, TT = Touch Tone. In

the above display, TT is currently selected.

2. Scroll through the list of features

with

ture appears.

Example: Authorized Reception -

press once.

↑

and

↓

until the required fea -

↓

AUTHORI Z. RX

S ELECT

OF F

YES

TO END

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

3. Change the setting by using

←

or → .

AUTHORI Z. RX

S ELECT

OF F

YES

TO END

4. Either:

❐ Change another setting: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Yes Function

A table showing the order of appearance of the switches is given below. Some of

these switches may not be seen depending on the options that you have installed

with the machine (1:Optional Memory or hard disk required, 2: Optional paper

feed unit required, 3: Optional printer interface kit required).

*:This only appears if you have asked a service technician to switch RDS on.

Feature

Telephone Line Type

Authorized Reception

Memory Lock ¹

Feature

↓

None

Once

Twice

Halftone Type

8 times

Daylight Saving Time/Summer Time 9 times

File Retention Time

10 times

11 times

Forwarding ¹

3 times Cassette used for Printer Mode ³

Specified Cassette Selection²

Power Saver

4 times

5 times

6 times

7 times

RDS *

Confidential File Report ¹

User Parameter Settings

A wide range of features can be switched on or off by using the User Parameters.

However, this feature is more difficult to use than the On/Off Switches. The

switches and adjustments are presented on the screen as rows of digits. Each

digit can be either 0 or 1. Each feature is allocated one or more digit. The value of

the digit determines the status of the feature.

The overall procedure is explained below. However, each of the adjustments that

can be made using this procedure are explained in the relevant parts of the

manual.

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

❐ At this time, you can print a User

Parameter List if you press

→

Start .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

2. The current settings for switch 00 are now displayed on the bottom line of the

display. If the settings for this switch are the way that you want them, go to

step 4.

❐ The top line shows the settings normally seen in a machine just delivered

from the factory.

3. To change the required setting, press a

number from 0 to 7 corresponding to the

digit that you wish to change.

Example: 0 . The value of the digit

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

changes, in this case from 0 to 1.

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

Each switch contains 8 digits, which act as on/off switches for various

features. The digits are numbered from 7 to 0; the setting of digit 7 is shown

at the left side of the display and digit 0 is at the right.

4. Either:

❐ Scroll through the switches with

appears. Then go to step 3.

❐ Finish: Yes Function

↑

and

↓

until the required switch

The user parameter switches are outlined below.

Switch 00 - Home position settings

Digit

Purpose

Stamp

0: Off

1: On (successfully scanned documents will be marked)

Digit 2 Digit 1 Setting Digit 2 Digit 1 Setting

Resolution

Normal

Lighten

Darken

Do not use this.

Resolution

Digit 4 Digit 3 Setting

Standard

Detail

Super Fine

Do not use this.

Transmission mode

0: Memory transmission

1: Immediate transmission

If you change any of the contrast, resolution, transmission mode, stamp, or halftone

settings before making a transmission, then:

0: The setting(s) will not return to the home position after the transmission.

1: The setting(s) will return to the home position after the transmission.

Halftone

0: Off

1: On

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Switch 01 - Printing of various items on received messages

Digit

Purpose

Mark to be printed at the receiving side to distinguish messages that are sent from

your machine when it is acting as a forwarding station (Memory card or hard disk

required)

0: Off

1: On

Forwarding mark:

Center mark

0: Off

1: On

The center mark is not printed when the machine is used for making copies

Reception time

TSI printing

Checkered mark

0: Off

1: On

Printing of the Command Information Line (ISDN kit required)

0: Off

1: On

This has the same effect as the TTI On/Off setting.

6, 7

Do not change these settings.

Switch 02 - Automatic printing of reports

Digit

Purpose

Transmission result report (memory transmission)

0: Off

1: On

Do not change this setting.

Memory storage report

Polling reserve report (polling reception)

Polling result report (polling reception)

0: Off

1: On

0: Off

1: On

Transmission result report (immediate transmission)

0: Off

1: On

Polling clear report

TCR

0: Off

1: On

Switch 03 - Automatic printing of reports, Various

Digit

Purpose

Inclusion of part of the image on the following reports: Transmission Result Report,

Memory Storage Report, Polling Clear Report, Communication Failure Report,

Transfer Result Report, Transmission Deadline Report, Polling Confirmation List

0: No

1: Yes

Do not change this setting.

Transfer Request by Tone Dial

Secure Transmission home position

Batch Transmission home position

Specified Image Area home position

Do not change these settings.

0: Disabled

0: Off

1: Enabled

1: On

0: Off

1: On

6 to 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Switch 04 - Various

Digit

Purpose

Do not change these settings.

Auto reduce

Do not change these settings.

0: Off

1: On

Restricted Access

Service Report Transmission

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

If this is set to 1, store your dealer’s fax number in Quick Dial Key 63. Then, when

you need to order toner, use the procedure on page 227.

If you wish to use Quick Dial 63 for a number other than that of your dealer, set this

bit to 0. Quick Dial Key 63 can now be programmed in the same way as other Quick

Dial Keys. However, you will not be able to use the Service Report Transmission

feature.

Ordering Toner

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

If this is set to 1, store your dealer’s fax number in Quick Dial Key 64. Then, when

you need to order toner, use the procedure on page 197.

If you wish to use Quick Dial 64 for a number other than that of your dealer, set this

bit to 0. Quick Dial Key 64 can now be programmed in the same way as other Quick

Dial Keys. However, you will not be able to use the Ordering Toner feature.

Switch 05 - Various

Digit

Purpose

Substitute reception

0: Off

1: On

Reverse order printing (Memory card or hard disk required)

0: Off

1: On

Two in One

Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received

Do not change these settings.

0: Off

0: Possible

1: On

1: Not possible

4 to 7

Switches 06 and 07 - Do not use

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

WARNING: Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than

that mentioned in this manual. This machine contains a laser

beam generator and direct exposure to laser beams can cause

permanent eye damage.

POWER AND GROUNDING

Pay attention to the following.

Power Supply

1. Power requirements: 115 V, 60 Hz

2. Insert the power plug securely into the wall

socket.

3. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the

machine and readily accessible.

4. Do not connect other equipment to the

same socket.

5. Do not step on or set anything on the

power cord.

6. Do not connect other equipment to the

same extension cord.

7. Be sure that the power cord is not in a

position where it would trip someone.

8. The wall outlet must be easily accessible.

Grounding

Ground the machine and the lightning protection circuit in accordance with

regulations. Do not ground to gas or water pipes, or to a telephone ground plug.

Proper grounding is to the ground terminal of the power outlet. Be sure that the

ground terminal of the power outlet is properly grounded.

The lightning protection circuit for the machine requires the machine to be

properly grounded. If proper grounding is provided, about 90% of lightning

damage can be prevented. For safety, be sure to connect the machine to a

three-prong grounded outlet.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

COLD WEATHER POWER-UP

Avoid raising the room temperature abruptly

when it is below 57°F, or condensation may

form inside the machine.

1. Raise the room temperature to 68°F at

less than 18°F per hour.

2. Wait for 30 to 60 minutes.

3. Turn the power on.

Do not use the machine near a humidifier.

THUNDERSTORMS

With proper grounding, about 90% of lightning

damage can be prevented. However, if

possible, during severe electric storms turn

the power switch off and disconnect the power

cord and telephone line cord.

Note for users with no hard disk

All fax messages stored in the memory

may be erased if power is switched off for

more than an hour.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

COPY PAPER

❐ 15-20 lb. copy paper is recommended: letter or legal sizes are the most

commonly used

❐ Do not use damp paper, or copies will be defective.

❐ Do not touch copy paper if your fingers are wet or oily; fingerprints may appear

on the copy.

❐ Keep paper in a vinyl bag if it will not be used for a long time.

❐ Store in a cool dry place.

❐ Store flat. Do not stand upright.

❐ The following materials cannot be used in the paper trays: Post cards, Tracing

paper, OHP sheets, Adhesive labels

❐ Do not overload the paper trays.

❐ If multi-sheet feeding occurs or dog-eared copies are made when using

recycled paper in the paper tray, fan the recycled paper and load it in the paper

tray again.

TONER CARTRIDGES

❐ Store in a cool, dark place.

❐ Never store where they may be exposed to heat.

❐ Keep out of the reach of children.

❐ Do not eat toner.

❐ Do not lay heavy objects on toner cartridges.

❐ Do not incinerate toner or toner containers. Toner dust may cause flashback

when exposed to an open flame.

OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

❐ While the machine is in operation, do not turn off the main switch or unplug the

power cord.

❐ Keep corrosive liquids, such as acid, off the machine.

❐ Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside

the machine.

❐ The fusing unit may be very hot. Be careful when handling it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

GENERAL

❐ Read the Important Safety Information at the front of this manual.

❐ Since some parts of the machine are supplied with high voltage, make sure

that you do not attempt any repairs or attempt to access any part of the

machine except those described in this manual.

❐ Do not make modifications or replacements other than those mentioned in this

manual.

❐ When not using the machine for a long period, disconnect the power cord.

OZONE

The machine generates ozone during operation. Normally, the ozone level is

safe for operators. However, during a long copy run or while printing a long

message, ozone odor may appear; in such a case, ventilate the room.

WARNING:

This symbol is attached to some components to alert the user

not to touch them, because they may be very hot.

This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of

important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the machine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GUIDE TO COMPONENTS

Document Table

Document Guide

Operation Panel

Telephone : optional

Manual Feed Button

Document Tray

Scanner Release

Lifting Handle

10 Front Cover Release

11 Cassette

12 Copy Tray

13 Lower Cassette(s) or Drawers: optional

Up to 4 units can be added below the

upper cassette

Power Switch (on the rear)

14 Base : optional

(labelled Cabinet Type 40 on the carton)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION PANEL

Power Indicator

Lights when the power switch is on. To use the machine, turn the

switch to ’On’.

Communicating

Indicator

Lights when a fax message is being transmitted or received.

Receive File

Indicator

Confidential File

Indicator

Lights when an incoming message was received into memory

because the machine was out of paper or jammed.

Lights when a confidential file has been received and stored in

the memory. Blinks when a message has been stored using

Memory Lock, if no confidential files are present.

Reception Mode

Selector Key

Stamp Key

Line Fail

Press to select Auto Receive or Manual Receive.

Press to enable or disable the stamp feature.

Blinks when transmission fails.

Indicator

Clear Copy

Indicator

Add Toner

Indicator

Call Service

Indicator

Clear

Blinks when paper has jammed in the printer.

Blinks when the toner cartridge is almost empty, and lights when

it is empty.

Blinks when the machine diagnostics detect a problem that

requires service.

Blinks when a document has jammed in the scanner.

Original

Indicator

Add Paper

Indicator

Lights when a cassette is empty.

Blinks when a cover is open.

Cover

Indicator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATION PANEL

Display

Displays prompts, warnings, and selected modes.

Press to use one of the numbered functions.

Use to answer questions on the display.

When an arrow is shown on the display, use this key to access

the options, items, or functions shown by the arrow. Also use it to

move the cursor when programming or editing a displayed item.

These indicators are only used when the optional Printer

Interface Kit is installed. See the operation manual for the Printer

Interface Kit for full details.

Function Key

Yes/No Keys

Scroll Key

PC Printer Option

Indicators

Halftone Key

Contrast

Press this to use halftone mode.

Press this to select either Darken, Normal, or Lighten.

Selector Key

Resolution Selector

Key

Press this to select either Standard, Detail, or Super Fine.

Memory Key

If the indicator is lit, your document will be stored before

transmission. If it is not lit, your document will be sent

immediately without being stored. Press the key to change the

mode.

G4/G3 Selector Key

Quick Dial Keys

When dialing, press this key to light the indicator that

corresponds with the type of network that you wish to

communicate on. The G4 setting is only available if you have

installed the optional ISDN Interface Kit.

Each of these can be programmed with a telephone number, a

group, or a keystroke program. You can also use these keys to

type names and labels such as the RTI and TTI.

To access keys 01 to 32, flip the number plate over to the right.

To access keys 33 to 64, flip the number plate over to the left.

User Function Keys

Each of these can be programmed for rapid access to frequently

used features. If the light under a key is on, the feature can be

used.

Press this to dial using Speed Dial or the Telephone Directory

Feature.

Press this to redial one of the last ten numbers that was dialed.

Press this to dial without picking up the handset.

Press this if you need to insert a pause when dialing.

Use this as a backspace key during programming.

Use this as a telephone keypad, or to enter Speed Dial codes.

Press this to stop the machine and return it to standby mode.

Press this to start fax communication.

Speed Dial/Tel

Directory Key

AI Redial Key

On Hook Dial Key

Pause Key

Clear Key

Ten Key Pad

Stop Key

Start Key

Copy Key

Press this to copy the document now in the feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLING THE MACHINE

LOCATION

For the best possible performance, install your machine in a place which satisfies

the following conditions.

❐ Not exposed to direct sunlight

❐ Well ventilated (air turnover at least three times per hour); to avoid the build-up

of ozone, make sure to locate the machine in a large well-ventilated room

which has an air turnover of more than 30 yd /hr per person.

❐ Level

❐ Not subject to vibration

❐ Away from other electronic equipment, to avoid interference

❐ Away from areas containing corrosive gas

❐ Dust-free

❐ Condensation-free

❐ Temperature 63 to 82 °F

❐ Humidity 40 to 70% RH (do not install near a humidifier)

❐ Away from heaters and air conditioners, to avoid sudden changes of

temperature

❐ Within 5 yards of a three-pin grounded power outlet (115 Volts, 60 Hz)

❐ With the clearance as shown on the right

4 "

NOTE: This machine generates a certain amount of ozone. Although the

amount generated is within safety requirements, it is recommended

that, to avoid ozone buildup, you install the machine in a room which

can be air-conditioned or well ventilated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLING THE MACHINE

CONNECTING THE MACHINE

A service technician will install the machine.

Before using the machine:

❐ Make sure that it is properly connected to the telephone line and the power

outlet, as shown below.

CAUTION

Do not switch on until everything is connected properly.

If you wish to move the machine to a new location, contact a service

technician.

❐ Program the Telephone Line Type setting (use Function 81; see page 28). If

your telephone normally sends out tones when dialing, use the TT setting; if it

normally sends out pulses, use the DP setting. Also, make sure that the switch

on the handset is set up correctly.

IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT POWER CONNECTION

❐ The wall outlet supply must not vary more than 20 V either side of 115 Vac.

❐ The power cord should not be laid in a place where it might trip somebody.

❐ Do not lay anything on the power cord.

❐ If you have to use an extension cord, make sure that it is capable of carrying

125V/15A, and that your facsimile terminal is the only piece of equipment

connected to that cord.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

SOME ITEMS MUST BE PROGRAMMED FIRST

Overview

After you have installed your new machine and connected it to the telephone line,

there are a few things that you have to do before you start to send fax messages

from your new machine.

You should set up your machine’s clock and identification. In fact, for faxes sent to

from, or within the United States, the United States’ Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) states that the fax message must contain header information

that identifies the sender (or the sender’s organization), and the date and time

that the fax was sent. To do this, program the following features.

❐ Date and Time/Daylight Saving Time: see page 24.

❐ RTI (Remote Terminal Identification): see page 26.

❐ TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification): see page 26.

❐ CSI (Called Subscriber Identification): see page 27.

In addition, you also have to make sure that the fax machine’s dialing circuits are

set up correctly. There are two settings: Pulse Dial, and Tone Dial. If you select

the wrong setting, your machine will not be able to dial fax numbers. If you are not

sure which setting to use, contact your telephone company. To change this

setting, see the following section of the manual.

❐ Telephone Line Type: see page 28.

Also, if you have a handset attached to your fax machine, make sure that its

dialing circuit is also set up correctly (there is probably a switch on the side of the

handset).

Language Selection

If your native language is Spanish or French, you can have the machine display

instructions and print reports in either of these languages instead of in English.

1. Function

LANGUAGE

S ELECT

ENGLI S H F RENCH S P ANI S H

YES

TO END

2. Use the

scroll key to move the cursor to the cor -

rect language. Press Yes Function to finish.

←

and → arrows on the

❐ Once you have done this, all displays and reports will be in the selected language.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Date and Time

Your fax machine has an internal clock. It controls the following features.

❐ The time display on the operation panel while the machine is idle.

❐ Operation of time-delay features like Send Later.

❐ The date and time that is printed out on pages that you receive, if Reception

Time is switched on.

❐ The date and time that is printed out at the other end on pages received from

your machine.

Program the correct date and time when you install the machine.

Cross-references:

Send Later: see page 60.

Reception Time: see page 149.

Economy Transmission: see page 66.

1. Function

CLOCK

F EB

I NP UT DATE/ TI ME

0 1 1 9 9 2 ( S AT) 0 1 : 5 6 P M

YES

TO END

2. Use the

←

and → arrows on the scroll key to move the cursor across

the display. Use the keypad to correct the individual elements.

❐ To change the month, move the cursor to the month and scroll through the

months with the

❐ To change from AM to PM and vice versa, move the cursor to the time, and

press or # .

↑

and

↓

keys.

❐ Press Yes Function when the display is correct.

Daylight Saving Time

Whenever local custom requires advancing the clock or setting the clock back,

use this feature. You can easily move the clock forwards when daylight saving

time begins, and back when it ends.

❐ When you install the machine for the first time, take care that the setting is

correct before you set the date and time.

1. Function

then ↓ until the screen is as shown

opposite.

DAYLI GHT S AVI NG TI ME S ELECT

ON OF F

YES

TO END

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

2. Use the ← and → arrows on the

scroll key to switch this feature on or off.

3. To store your setting: Yes

Terminal Identification

There are three labels which identify yourself to the operator at the other end.

These labels are called the RTI, the TTI, and the CSI.

❐ RTI (Remote Terminal Identification) and CSI (Called Subscriber

Identification): These appear at the other end in the display on the operation

panel during communication, and on reports after communication.

❐ TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification): This is printed at the other end at the

top of each page received from your machine.

You can see the RTI, TTI, and CSI of the other party during the communication

(see the following diagram) and on reports printed by the machine later.

TTI

RTI or CSI

Some machines may reject your transmitted fax messages if you have not

stored the RTI, TTI, or CSI in advance.

Note: You can switch the TTI off for a particular transmission if you do not wish

it to be printed on your pages as they are printed at the other end. See

page 64.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

RTI (Remote Terminal Identification)

Your RTI appears on the other party’s operation panel during communication, if

the other machine was made by the same manufacturer as yours. The RTI can

have up to 20 characters (numbers and letters can be used, along with some

punctuation marks). Program something easy to recognize, such as your name,

company name, or department name within the company.

1. Function

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

RTI

shown opposite.

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

2. Yes

RTI

TO CANCEL

ABC

3. Input the RTI that you will be using.

Example: XYZ COMPANY

YES

CLR

Note: Not more than 20 characters.

RTI

Input and editing are

explained on page 7.

XYZ COMP ANY

ABC

4. Yes Function

TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)

Your TTI is printed at the other end on the top edge of each page that you send.

The TTI can have up to 32 characters (numbers and letters can be used, along

with some punctuation marks). Program something easy to recognize, such as

your name, company name, or department name within the company.

1. Function

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

TTI

shown opposite.

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

2. Yes

TTI

LABEL I NS ERTI ON

YES

S ELECT

TO END

1 . I NP UT

2 . COP Y RTI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

3. Either:

❐ Copy the RTI across and store that

as the TTI: 2 . Then go to step 5.

(Or, if you wish to edit the TTI:

↑

Yes )

❐ Input a new TTI or edit the TTI that

is already there: 1 . Go to step 4.

TTI

TO CANCEL

ABC

4. Input the TTI that you will be using.

Example: XYZ COMPANY HEAD OFFICE

YES

CLR

TTI

Note: Not more than 32 characters.

Input and editing are

explained on page 7.

XYZ CO. HEAD OF F I CE

ABC

5. Yes Function

CSI (Called Subscriber Identification)

Your CSI appears on the other party’s operation panel during communication

instead of your RTI, if the other party’s machine is another manufacturer’s

product. The CSI can have up to 20 characters (only numbers and spaces can be

used). Enter your fax machine’s telephone number, because some features of

your machine may not work if the CSI is not the same as the telephone number.

1. Function

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

CS I

shown opposite.

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

CS I

2. Yes

YES

TO END

3. Input your telephone number.

Note: Not more than 20 digits.

❐ If you wish to input a "+" sign, to signify

your international dial access code (this is

a common practice in Europe): 31

YES

CLR

CS I

2 1 2 - 5 5 5 - 6 7 8 9

4. Yes Function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Telephone Line Type

If the setting of this feature is incorrect, you will not be able to dial using the

machine’s keypad or automatic dialer.

There are two basic types of telephone company exchange:

❐ Exchanges using Tone Dialing (also known as DTMF, TT, or sometimes PB)

❐ Exchanges using Pulse Dialing (also known as PD or DP)

The telephone line type setting in your fax machine must match the type of

exchange that you are connected to. If you are not sure what type your local

exchange is, ask the telephone company.

Note: If there is a handset connected to your fax machine, make sure that it is

also set up in the correct dialing mode.

Change the setting for the fax machine using Function 81.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

The first displayed item is the telephone line

type: DP = Pulse Dial, TT = Touch Tone. In

the above display, TT is currently selected.

2. Change the setting by using

←

or → .

3. Finish: Yes Function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

QUICK DIAL, SPEED DIAL, AND GROUP DIAL

Three Convenient Ways to Dial

Instead of dialing the full number on the fax machine’s keypad, you can use

Speed Dial, Quick Dial or Group Dial.

These features allow you to store telephone numbers in your machine’s memory.

(A stored number will remain in the memory, and you can use it as many times as

you wish without having to reprogram it.)

Then, when you need to dial a number, just call it up (for example, by pressing the

required Quick Dial Key).

Quick Dial and Speed Dial

Quick Dial and Speed Dial are very convenient for dialing numbers that you often

call, especially if these numbers are very long (like international numbers).

These features greatly improve the convenience of operating your machine.

However, first, you have to program the telephone numbers that you need into the

Quick Dial Keys and Speed Dial Codes in your machine.

After programming your Quick Dials and Speed Dials, you can dial a telephone

number with very few keystrokes.

❐ For Quick Dial, just press a Quick Dial Key then press Start.

❐ For Speed Dial, press the key on the operation panel labeled "Speed Dial",

enter a two-digit Speed Dial Code, then press Start.

You can also access Speed Dial codes using the Telephone Directory feature

(see page 58).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

You can store up to 64 Quick Dial Keys and 100 Speed Dial Codes in this model.

When you store a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, you can also store the name of the

other party as a quick reference (this name will be displayed on the operation

panel before you press the Start key, so you can check whether you have

selected the correct number). This label is used with features such as Telephone

Directory or Label Insertion.

For the Quick Dial Keys, you can also attach adhesive labels to the quick dial

plate.

Cross-references

Telephone Directory: see page 58.

Label Insertion: see page 120.

Groups

If you frequently send the same message at the same time to more than one

place, program these telephone numbers into a group. Then you can send the

messages to all the addresses in that group with just a few keystrokes.

You can also program a name for that group (for example, "Branch Offices"),

which will be displayed before you press the Start key. This helps you to check

whether you selected the correct group.

You can store up to 10 Groups in this machine.

Groups can be used with the following features.

❐ Sending to More Than One Location (Broadcasting); see page 51.

❐ Transfer Request; see page 87.

❐ Polling Reception; see page 158.

Caution: There are limits on the number of addresses that can be dialed with

each of these features. Do not store more numbers in the group

than the capacity of the feature that you plan to use it with. These

limits are:

Broadcasting: 200 addresses

Transfer Request: 30 addresses

Polling Reception: 200 addresses

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Programming Quick Dial

This machine has 64 Quick Dial Keys (01 to 64), each of which can be

programmed as one of the following: Quick Dial Key, Group, Auto Document, or

Keystroke Program. The page number in the following table shows the location of

the programming procedure.

Quick Dial

Group

A fax or telephone number

This page

Page 38

A set of fax numbers that you often wish to

send the same fax to at the same time.

A program of settings, features, and

destinations.

Keystroke Program

Auto Document

Page 99

A page that you often send, such as a map.

Page 106

Using the following procedure, you can store telephone numbers as Quick Dials.

You can also store a label with each number for use with the Label Insertion

feature.

Cross-reference

Label Insertion: see page 120.

Note: You cannot use the following procedure to store Groups, Keystroke Pro -

grams or Auto Documents.

Programming a New Quick Dial

1. Function

QUI CK DI AL

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

❐ At this time, you can print a Quick Dial

List if you press

→

Start .

TO CANCEL

2. Press the Quick Dial Key that you wish

to program. Example: 01

YES

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

❐ If you pressed the wrong key,

press No

3. Yes

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

ENTER F AX NUMBER

TO CANCEL

YES

CLR

4. Enter the telephone number at the op -

eration panel’s ten key pad.

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

If your machine is behind a PBX, include the access code and a pause before the tel. number.

For an international number, place a pause after the country code. To input a pause, press the

Pause key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

5. Yes

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

ENTER LABEL

ABC

6. Either:

❐ Input a label using the Quick Dial

keys. Then press Yes .

Inputting and editing labels: see page 7.

❐ Do not program a label:

Press Yes .

QUI CK DI AL

OP TI ON S ETTI NG

LABEL I NS ERTI ON

OF F

YES

S ELECT

TO END

7. Switch Label Insertion on or off.

Use the ← and → arrows on the

scroll key to select the required setting.

Then:

Yes

QUI CK DI AL

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

8. Either

❐ Program another: Go to step 2

❐ Finish: Function

Editing a Quick Dial

1. Function

QUI CK DI AL

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

2. Press the Quick Dial key that you wish

YES

to edit. Example: 01

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

XYZ CO. NEW YORK

❐ If the wrong number is displayed, use

the

↑

and

↓

keys to scroll through

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

the Quick Dial Keys on the screen.

YES

CLR

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

3. Yes

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

4. Edit the number.

❐ Use

←

and

→

to move the cursor, and

YES

CLR

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

use Clear to delete the character at the

cursor.

XYZ CO. NEW YORK

ABC

After entering the new number,

press Yes .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

5. Either

❐ Change the label: Edit the existing

label, then press Yes .

❐ Keep the label as it is: Yes

QUI CK DI AL

OP TI ON S ETTI NG

LABEL I NS ERTI ON

OF F

Inputting and editing labels: see

page 7.

YES

S ELECT

TO END

6. Switch Label Insertion on or off.

Use the ← and → arrows on the

scroll key to select the required setting.

Then:

Yes

QUI CK DI AL

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

7. Either

❐ Program another: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function

Erasing a Quick Dial

1. Function

QUI CK DI AL

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

2. Press the Quick Dial key that you wish

to erase. Example: 01

❐ If the wrong number is displayed, use

YES

QUI CK DI AL

the

↑

and

↓

keys to scroll through the

Quick Dial Keys on the screen.

0 1

XYZ CO. NEW YORK

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

YES

CLR

3. Yes

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

ENTER F AX NUMBER

4. Erase the number: No .

TO CANCEL

After erasing a number, you may store a new one to replace it if you wish.

If you do not wish to store a new number, press No again. Then go to step 2

to continue or press Function if you have finished.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Programming Speed Dials

Using this feature, you can store telephone numbers as Speed Dial Codes. You

can also store a label with each telephone number for use with the Telephone

Directory and Label Insertion features.

Telephone Directory

This makes using Speed Dial Codes more convenient.

When you program a Speed Dial Code, you can program a name and a telephone number.

Then, instead of having to refer to the latest Speed Dial Code list when you want to dial that

number, you can type in the first letter of the name, and scroll through the list of names that

begin with that letter until you find the right one.

You may also program the letter under which you wish to file the label. For example, if a

Speed Dial Code has the label HOTEL NEW YORK, you may wish to file this label under N

instead of under H if your Telephone Directory contains a lot of hotels. This would make it

easier to find using the Telephone Directory feature; type in N instead of H, then scroll through

the N’s until you find the HOTEL NEW YORK.

Cross-reference

Label Insertion: see page 120.

Telephone Directory: see page 58.

Programming a New Speed Dial

1. Function

❐ At this time, you can print a Speed Dial

List if you press

S P EED DI AL

ENTER S P EED CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

→

Start

2. Input the Speed Dial Code that you wish

to program (from 00 to 99).

YES

Example:

S P EED DI AL

0 0

❐ If you input the wrong code,

press No

3. Yes

S P EED DI AL

0 0

ENTER F AX NUMBER

TO CANCEL

YES

CLR

4. Enter the telephone number at the op -

eration panel’s ten key pad.

S P EED DI AL

0 0

0 1 1 4 4 7 1 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

If your machine is behind a PBX, include the access code and a pause before the telephone

number.

For an international number, place a pause after the country code. To input a pause, press the

Pause key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

5. Yes

S P EED DI AL

0 0

ENTER LABEL

ABC

6. Either:

❐ Input a label using the Quick Dial

keys (such as XYZ CO. LONDON).

Then press Yes .

YES

CLR

S P EED DI AL

0 0

Inputting and editing labels: see

page 7.

I NP UT:

ABC

❐ Do not program a label for this

number: Press Yes . Go to step 9.

7. The letter shown next to " I NP UT" will be used with the Telephone Directory

feature when searching for a name.

Either:

❐ Do not change the letter : press Yes .

❐ If you wish to use another letter, input the letter.

Example: Change to "L" for London;

Clear

Yes

S P EED DI AL

OP TI ON S ETTI NG

LABEL I NS ERTI ON

OF F

YES

S ELECT

TO END

8. Switch Label Insertion on or off.

Use the ← and → arrows

on the scroll key to select the required

setting. Then: Yes

S P EED DI AL

ENTER S P EED CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

9. Either:

❐ Program another: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Editing a Speed Dial

1. Function

S P EED DI AL

ENTER S P EED CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

2. Input the Speed Dial Code that you wish

to edit. Example:

❐ If the wrong number is displayed, press No

or use the and keys to scroll

through the Speed Dial Codes on the screen.

YES

↑

↓

S P EED DI AL

0 0

XYZ CO. LONDON

0 1 1 4 4 7 1 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

YES

CLR

3. Yes

S P EED DI AL

0 0

0 1 1 4 4 7 1 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

4. Edit the number.

❐ Use

←

and

→

to move the cursor, and

use Clear to delete the cursor character.

After entering the new number,

press Yes .

YES

CLR

S P EED DI AL

0 0

XYZ CO. LONDON

ABC

5. Either

❐ Change the label: Edit the existing

label, then press Yes .

YES

CLR

❐ Keep the label as it is: Yes

S P EED DI AL

0 0

Inputting and editing labels: see

page 7.

I NP UT:

ABC

6. Either:

❐ Change the letter in the INPUT col -

umn (for example, to P): Clear

Yes

❐ Do not change the letter: Yes .

S P EED DI AL

OP TI ON S ETTI NG

LABEL I NS ERTI ON

S ELECT

OF F

YES

TO END

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

7. Switch Label Insertion on or off. Use the

and → arrows on the scroll key

to select the required setting.

←

Then:

Yes

S P EED DI AL

ENTER S P EED CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

8. Either

❐ Program another: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function

Erasing a Speed Dial

S P EED DI AL

ENTER S P EED CODE

P RI NT LI S T

1. Function

TO CANCEL

2. Input the Speed Dial Code that you wish

to erase. Example:

❐ If the wrong number is displayed, press No

or use the and keys to scroll

through the Speed Dial Codes on the screen.

YES

S P EED DI AL

↑

↓

0 0

XYZ CO. LONDON

0 1 1 4 4 7 1 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

YES

CLR

3. Yes

S P EED DI AL

0 0

0 1 1 4 4 7 1 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

4. Erase the number: No .

S P EED DI AL

0 0

ENTER F AX NUMBER

TO CANCEL

After erasing a number, you can store a new one to replace it.

If you do not wish to store a new number, press No again, then go to step

2 to continue or press Function if you have finished.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Programming Groups

Groups allow you to combine some numbers into one group, for easy sequential

transmission to all the numbers in that group. These numbers can be selected

from those already stored in Quick Dial Keys or Speed Dial Codes, or you can

select other numbers by entering them at the keypad.

You can also store a label with each Group. This label will be displayed when you

select the Group.

Note: See page 51 to see how to dial a group.

The Group programming procedure has several modules. Entering Group

Programming mode will be explained first, followed by each of the modules.

Entering Group Programming Mode and Selecting a Group

1. Function

GROUP DI AL

GROUP S ETTI NG

P RI NT LI S T

❐ At this time, you can print a Group List if

you press

→

Start .

TO CANCEL

2. Input the number of the group that you

wish to program.

❐ There are 10 groups, from 01 to 10.

Example: Group 01,

Yes

❐ If this group already exists, go to step 4.

❐ If you input the wrong group number,

press No

GROUP DI AL

CHOOS E KEY

YES

G 0 1

TO S KI P

TO CANCEL

3. Press the Quick Dial Key in which you

wish to store this new group.

Example: 08

YES

❐ If you pressed the wrong key: No

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1

0 8

4. Yes

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8

S ELECT

YES

DES T.

TO END

1 . ADDRES S 2 . CHECK 3 . LABEL

You are now ready to access one of the five Group Programming Modules. These

are explained on the following pages.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Storing Numbers in a Group

First, enter Group Programming mode as explained on page 38. Then:

1. Press 1 .

GROUP DI AL

ENTER F AX NUMBER

TO CANCEL

G 0 1

0 8 DES T.

2. Input the number that you wish to store

in the group. For example:

YES

CLR

GROUP DI AL

❐ Quick Dial 25: 25

G 0 1

0 8 DES T.

2 5

XYZ COMP ANY ROME

YES

CLR

❐ Speed Dial 00: Speed Dial

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8 DES T.

0 0

XYZ COMP ANY P ARI S

YES

CLR

❐ Full number: Input at the keypad

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8 DES T.

0 1 1 - 4 4 - 2 1 - 5 8 4 2 2 6 1

on the operation panel.

3. Store the number in the group: Yes

GROUP DI AL

ENTER F AX NUMBER

TO CANCEL

❐ The number after DEST has increased by 1.

The number after DEST shows how many

telephone numbers are stored in the group.

G 0 1

0 8

DES T.

NOTE: Do not store more than 200 numbers in a Group. If you plan to use

this Group for Transfer Requests, do not store more than 30 in it.

4. Either:

❐ Input another number: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish storing numbers in this

group: No .

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8

S ELECT

YES

DES T.

TO END

1 . ADDRES S 2 . CHECK 3 . LABEL

Now, you can either:

❐ Use another module (press a key from 1 to 5).

❐ Start working on another Group (press Yes then go to step 2 of the

procedure on page 38).

❐ Return to standby mode by pressing

Function .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Checking Which Numbers are Already in the Group

First, enter Group Programming mode as explained on page 38. Then:

1. Press 2 .

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8 DES T.

TO CANCEL

CLR

1 / 2 5

CLR:

XYZ COMP ANY ROME

2. Press ↓ to scroll through the numbers

on the display.

❐ To erase the displayed number:

Clear .

❐ When you have finished checking

this group: No .

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8

S ELECT

YES

DES T.

TO END

3. Now, you can either:

1 . ADDRES S 2 . CHECK 3 . LABEL

❐ Use another module (press a key

from 1 to 5).

❐ Start working on another Group

(press Yes then go to step 2 of the procedure on page 38).

❐ Return to standby mode by pressing

Function .

Storing a Label for this Group

First, enter Group Programming mode as explained on page 38. Then:

1. Press 3 .

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8

ENTER LABEL

ABC

2. Input a label for the group using the Quick Dial keys.

Example: EUROPE BRANCHES

GROUP DI AL

YES

CLR

Inputting and editing labels: see

page 7.

G 0 1

0 8

EUROP E BRANCHES

ABC

3. Press Yes .

GROUP DI AL

S ELECT

YES

G 0 1

0 8

DES T.

TO END

1 . ADDRES S 2 . CHECK 3 . LABEL

Now, you can either:

❐ Use another module (press a key from 1 to 5).

❐ Start working on another Group (press Yes then go to step 2 of the

procedure on page 38).

❐ Return to standby mode by pressing

Function .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Storing a Group Transfer Station

The Group Transfer Station is one of the features of this machine that allows you

to set up fax transmission networks.

Briefly, the Group Transfer Station allows another party to send you a fax

message and instruct your machine to send it to each number in the same Group,

through the Group Transfer Station, which acts as a broadcaster. This means that

your machine will relay the fax message to the Group Transfer Station, and that

station will then send it on to each of the numbers stored in that Group. All this will

be done automatically, without requiring your presence at the machine.

Your Machine

Group:

Group Transfer Station: C

End Receivers: D, E, and F

The use of the Group Transfer Station is described in more detail in the section

entitled "Networking".

To store a Group Transfer Station for a particular Group, first, enter Group

Programming mode as explained on page 38. Then:

1. Press 4 .

GROUP DI AL

ENTER TRANS F . S TN

TO CANCEL

G 0 1

0 8 DES T.

2. Store the telephone number of the termi -

nal that you wish to act as the Group

Transfer Station for this group.

❐ Input the number as a Quick Dial, Speed Dial,

or full number at the keypad.

YES

CLR

Example: Quick Dial 15, press 15 .

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1

0 8 DES T.

1 5

XYZ COMP ANY LONDON

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

3. Yes

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8

S ELECT

YES

DES T.

TO END

1 . ADDRES S 2 . CHECK 3 . LABEL

Now, you can either:

❐ Use another module (press a key from 1 to 5).

❐ Start working on another Group (press Yes then go to step 2 of the

procedure on page 38).

❐ Return to standby mode by pressing

Function .

Erasing the Group

This procedure deletes this Group and all the numbers stored in it. The Speed

Dial Codes and Quick Dial Keys that you used in this Group will not be deleted

from the memory; you can continue to use them for other purposes.

First, enter Group Programming mode as explained on page 38. Then:

GROUP DI AL

1. Press 5 .

G 0 1

CLEAR?

0 8 WI LL BE ALL CLEARED

YES

2. Either:

❐ To delete the group: Yes

❐ To keep the group: No

GROUP DI AL

G 0 1 0 8

S ELECT

YES

DES T.

TO END

1 . ADDRES S 2 . CHECK 3 . LABEL

Now, you can either:

❐ Use another module (press a key from 1 to 5).

❐ Start working on another Group (press Yes then go to step 2 of the

procedure on page 38).

❐ Return to standby mode by pressing

Function .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

Limits on the Use of Stored Telephone Numbers

When you use the three features listed in the following table, you can dial more

than one number. However, there are some limitations, as explained on this page.

COMMUNICATION PAGE MAX. NUMBER OF TOTAL

TOTAL

MAX. STORED

PAGES

FEATURE

ADDRESSES/FAX FAXES ADDRESSES

MESSAGE

FOR ALL

FAXES

Broadcasting

Transfer Request

✬

( 1)

200

500

(Note: Any

fax number

can be used

for more than

one fax

message at

the same

time)

Polling Reception

✬

200

1200 ( 4)

158

200

The following table shows how many telephone numbers you can store in the

machine.

Quick Dials

Speed Dials

Ten Key Pad ( 2)

100

✬

Groups ( 3)

^✬1 The limitations on this feature are imposed by the capacity of the broadcasting

machine.

^✬2 This is the number of full telephone numbers that can be input into the

machine at any one time. For example, if there is a broadcasting operation in

memory using 64 full numbers, you can only input one more full number for

any operation, including storage in groups, until the broadcast has finished.

Also, if you have stored, say, 30 numbers at the ten key pad into your groups,

then you will only be able to input 35 full dial numbers at any one time for

other operations, such as broadcasting.

^✬3 You can program up to 10 groups. Each group can contain up to 200

numbers; however, if you plan to use a Group for Transfer Request, make

sure that this group does not have more than 30 numbers.

You can store any Quick Dial or Speed Dial number in a group. You may also

store up to 65 numbers that are not programmed as Quick or Speed Dials;

see Note 2 above for the restrictions on the use of these numbers.

^✬4 This is the theoretical maximum number of pages that can be stored. In

practice, you will only be able to store this number of pages if you install the

optional hard disk unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE YOU SEND YOUR FIRST FAX

DEALING WITH JUNK FAX MAIL

The following features will help you to reject unwanted junk fax mail.

❐ Authorized Reception: see page 132.

❐ Closed Network (Reception): see page 152.

❐ Rejection of messages from unauthorized senders: see page 131.

OTHER ITEMS TO PROGRAM AT YOUR LEISURE

The following features will help you use the machine more quickly and efficiently.

❐ Auto Document: see page 106.

❐ User Function Keys: see page 163.

❐ Function Programs: see page 164.

❐ Keystroke Programs: see page 99.

❐ Chain Dialing: see page 116.

❐ Ordering Toner: see page 197.

To use the full range of features provided by this fax machine, you need to

program other items. These procedures are all given in the relevant sections of

the manual.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Precautions Concerning Unacceptable Document Types

Before you send your document, make sure that it meets the following

requirements.

Caution: Documents that do not meet these requirements can cause your

machine to jam or may cause some components of the machine to become

damaged or dirty.

Correct Size for the Document Feeder

Thickness: 2 to 8 mils (20 lb paper)

Length and Width: See the above diagram.

If the page is too short, put it inside a document carrier or enlarge it with a copier.

If the page is too long, divide it into two or more sheets.

Clearly Written

Small faint characters may not be transmitted clearly.

Uniform Page Size

Do not use different sizes of document in the same transmission.

Dry Ink

All ink must be dry before you place the document in the feeder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

Page Condition

Do not place damaged pages in the automatic document feeder.

Originals that contain the following materials should not be placed in the

document feeder. Make copies of these originals and scan the copies.

Note: Copies made with a copier that uses silicone oil may cause a misfeed. To

avoid this, do not scan such copies until five or ten minutes after copying.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Transmission Procedure at a Glance

Overview

There are two ways to send a fax message.

❐ Immediate Transmission

❐ Memory Transmission

Immediate Transmission

Immediate Transmission is convenient when:

❐ You wish to send a message immediately

❐ You quickly wish to check whether you have successfully connected with the

other party

❐ Your machine’s memory is getting full

The machine dials immediately after you press Start (or at the specified later time,

if you used a time-delay feature like Send Later). The message is scanned and

transmitted page by page without being stored in memory.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

Memory Transmission

Memory Transmission is convenient because:

❐ Fax messages can be scanned much more quickly (you can take your

document away from the fax machine without waiting too long).

❐ While your fax message is being sent, another user can operate the machine

(people will not have to wait by the fax machine too long).

❐ You can send the same message to more than one place with the same

operation.

After you press Start, the machine doesn’t dial until all the pages of your fax

message have been stored in the memory.

The default mode of this machine is Memory Transmission, so the procedures

described in this manual will be based on the assumption that you are using

Memory Transmission. Immediate Transmission is described in a separate

section.

Cross-references

Send Later: see page 60.

Economy Transmission: see page 66.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Sending to Just One Location

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode:

❐ The display on the operation panel must

be as shown on the right.

MEMORY TRANS .

S ET DOCUMENT

AP R. 4 . 1 2 : 2 5 P M

MEMORY 1 0 0 %

2. Carefully place your fax message into

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

the auto document feeder.

❐ To dial without placing the message in the

feeder first, see Direct Fax Number Entry on

page 68.

ENTER F AX NUMBER

❐ If you only wish to scan a part of the

document, use the Specified Image Area

feature. See page 118 for details.

❐ Do not use pages of different sizes.

❐ The pages should be arranged loosely,

but the leading edges should be tidy, as

shown above.

❐ The pages must be placed face down in the

feeder, with the first page at the bottom of the

stack.

❐ Feed the pages in so that the top edge goes in

first.

❐ Do not feed in more than 50 pages.

❐ Do not use unsuitable types of original (see

pages 45 and 46).

❐ Adjust the document guides to fit the width of

the pages.

Selecting Contrast and Resolution: See page 54.

Options for Sending a Message: See page 59.

Scanning only a part of the document (Specified Image Area): See page 118.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

3. Dial in one of the following ways.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

P RES S YES OR CLR

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

✬

a) Ten Key Pad

b) Quick Dial

c) Speed Dial

d) Handset

✬

: Only if the telephone handset is installed.

If your machine is behind a PBX, dial the access code, then a pause, then the telephone

number.

For an international number, press the Pause key after entering the country code.

4. Start

S TORI NG

P AGE

F I LE NO.

MEMORY 9 9 %

The machine stores your fax message.

0 0 5 6

5. The machine dials, and the line to the other party is connected.

Note: Watch the display. The identification of the other party will appear.

6. After sending the message, the machine hangs up automatically.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Sending to More Than One Location (Broadcasting)

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49).

2. Make sure that the Memory indicator is lit. If it is not, press Memory .

3. Place your fax message face down into the feeder.

❐ If you only wish to scan a part of the

document, use the Specified Image Area

feature. See page 118 for details.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

To broadcast without placing the

message in the feeder first, see page 68.

ENTER F AX NUMBER

Selecting Contrast and Resolution: See page 54.

Options for Sending a Message: See page 59.

Scanning only a part of the document (Specified Image Area): See page 118.

4. Dial in one of the following ways.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

P RES S YES OR CLR

You can program a User Function Key

for use with Group Dial. See below.

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

a) Ten Key Pad

b) Quick Dial

c) Speed Dial

d) Group Dial ✬

✬ : Method 1: Press the Quick Dial Key the Group is stored in (in the example, press key 08).

Method 2: If you do not know which Quick Dial Key the Group is stored in but you do know

the Group number, use Method 2. You must have programmed one of the User Function

Keys in advance with code 02 (Group Dial), using Function 35 (see page 163). In the above

example, F4 has been made the Group Dial key; press F4 then input the Group number.

If your machine is behind a PBX, dial the access code, then a pause, then the telephone

number. For an international number, place a pause after the country code. To input a pause,

press the Pause key.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

5. Yes

MEMORY TRANS .

ENTER NO. OR

OP TI ONS

START

DES T:

Here, DES T: 2 indicates that the machine is

asking you to input the second telephone

number in your list of destinations for this fax

message.

6. Either

❐ Dial another number: Go to step 4.

❐ Press Start .

S TORI NG

P AGE

MEMORY 9 9 %

F I LE NO.

0 0 5 6

The machine will dial the first destination (or, if you selected Send Later, it will

return to standby mode and the fax message will be sent at the time that you

selected).

NOTE: In theory, you can send the same fax message to up to 200 different

destinations using the above procedure. However, this number

depends on how many numbers are currently waiting in memory to be

dialed. See the table on page 43 for more information concerning the

limitations to this feature.

Check your Destinations Before Dialing

If you wish to send a fax message to more than one location, you can scroll

through the list of telephone numbers that you have input so far to check whether

you have missed any out or entered any wrong numbers.

This feature is useful when using features such as Broadcasting, Transfer

Request, and Polling Reception.

Cross-reference

Broadcasting: see page 51.

Transfer Request: see page 87.

Polling Reception: see page 158.

YES NO

1. Press

↓

CHECK DES T.

P RES S

0 1 XYZ CO. NEW YORK

DES T. :

❐ The number after DES T shows how

many numbers you have input so far.

2. Use the

↓

arrow to scroll through the list of destinations that you have

already input.

❐ To cancel a destination that you have input by mistake: No

❐ To finish checking: Yes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Possible Problems

You want to take out the document

Press the scanner release button, open the scanner, and take out the document.

Caution: Do not pull out the document without opening the scanner, or you

will damage the machine.

You want to send more than 50 pages

While the last page is being fed in, place more pages (up to 50) in the feeder.

You made a mistake while dialing

If you already pressed Start , press Stop immediately.

If you haven’t pressed Start yet, either:

❐

No . The entire number is deleted. Enter a new number.

Clear . Only the last digit is deleted.

Indicators are blinking

❐ If the Clear Original indicator ( ) is blinking:

Take out the document (see page 213). Then redial the destination.

❐ If the Line Fail indicator ( ) on the operation panel is blinking:

If the Communicating lamp is not lit, press Stop .

If the Communicating lamp is lit, wait until it goes out, then press Stop .

The buzzer is ringing

The other party wishes to speak with you. Proceed as shown below.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

Contrast, Resolution, and Halftone Modes

You may wish to send many different types of fax message. Some of these may

be difficult to reproduce at the other end. However, your machine has three

settings that you can adjust to help you transmit your document with the best

possible image quality.

RESOLUTION

CONTRAST

R -

Standard

Contras! Normal

Contrast

If you are not sure whether your settings are suitable, make a copy of the

document using these settings The printout shows how the fax message will

look when it is printed at

other end.

If your fax message has more than one page, you can select different settings

for each page. For example, if you wish to use a different resolution just for

page 2, change the resolution setting while page 1 is being scanned. Then,

while page 2 is being scanned, you can return the resolution setting to the

original setting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

Contrast

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

The text and diagrams in your document must stand out clearly from the paper

they are written on. If your document has a darker background than normal (for

example, a newspaper clipping), or if the writing is faint, adjust the contrast.

There are three grades.

Normal: Suitable for most documents

Darken: Use for documents with faint writing (such as those written in pencil)

Lighten: Use for documents that have a dark or patchy background

Resolution

If your document contains fine print or detailed diagrams, use a higher resolution

setting.

Standard: Suitable for most typewritten documents

Detail: Use for documents with small print or fine details

Fine: Use this for high quality reproduction

Super Fine: 400 dpi memory option required

Note: Super fine is available when the sender and receiver each have the 400 dpi

machine has 4 resolution modes, but there are 3 resolution indicators

on the operation panel. So, when you would like to know which mode you are

using, see the mode column on the TCR report.

Halftone

If your document contains a photograph, or diagrams with complex shading

patterns or grays, switch Halftone Mode onto achieve optimum image quality.

With Halftone

Without Halftone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

Selecting the Halftone Type

This model has two types of Halftone, the Dither Process, and the higher quality

Error Diffusion Process. To change the currently used Halftone type, perform the

following procedure.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the list of features with

the ↑ and keys until S ELECT

↓

S ELECT HALF TONE

S P D MODE

S ELECT

HALF TONE appears.

S TD MODE

YES

TO END

3. Change the setting by using

←

or → .

SPD MODE: The machine will use the Basic Halftone Process.

STD MODE: The machine will use the higher quality Error Diffusion Process.

4. Finish: Yes Function

Halftone Mode slows down the transmission speed, and may increase your

communication costs, especially if you use the Error Diffusion process. Higher

resolutions also do this. This is because these settings create larger amounts of

data to be sent.

Messages are transmitted the fastest if you use the standard resolution

setting, and keep Halftone off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Home Position Setting Adjustments

For the contrast, resolution, and halftone, you can select whether the settings

return to home position at the end of transmission (in a new machine, they do).

Also, you can change the home positions of these settings.

If you need other adjustments, contact a service representative.

The procedure is as follows (see page 10 if you need more information about the

User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

❐ At this time, you can print a User

Parameter List if you press

→

Start .

7 6 4 32 1

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

The settings that you may need to change are those for digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 7.

The functions of these are as follows.

Digit

Purpose

Resolution home position

Digit 2 Digit 1 Setting

Normal

Lighten

Darken

Do not use this.

Resolution home position

Digit 4 Digit 3 Setting

Standard

Detail

Super Fine

Do not use this.

If you change any of the contrast, resolution, transmission mode, stamp, or halftone

settings before making a transmission, then:

0: The setting(s) will not return to the home position after the transmission.

1: The setting(s) will return to the home position after the transmission.

Halftone on/off home position

0: Off

1: On

3. If you wish to change one of the settings, press the key on the ten key pad

that corresponds to the digit that you wish to change.

Example: 3 . The value of digit 3 changes.

4. Finish: Yes Function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

Dialing with the Telephone Directory

This can be done for any number that you have stored as a Speed Dial Code with

a label programmed for it.

Example: You wish to dial "XYZ CO. LONDON".

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49).

2. Place your document in the feeder.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

3. Speed Dial/Tel Directory

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

4. Press the first letter of the name: X

(Quick Dial Key 24 or 48 )

Press

repeatedly until the correct

TELEP HONE DI RECTORY

number is displayed.

YES

S CROLL:

P RES S

0 1 XYZ CO. LONDON

5. Yes

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

YES

CLR

P RES S

0 1 XYZ CO. LONDON

6. Yes again.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

DES T:

START

ENTER NO. OR

7. Either:

❐ Dial more numbers.

❐ Press Start .

Programming Speed Dial Codes: See page 34.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Optional Features for Transmission

When you make a routine transmission, you can access a few optional features.

These options are only available if " OP TI ONS

" can be seen in the top right

corner of the display.

Personal Code

Personal Codes do the following.

❐ They allow you to keep track of machine usage (for example, for billing

purposes). If everybody uses a Personal Code when they use the fax machine,

the codes, or the names programmed into the codes, will be printed on the

report that is called the TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report). This will help

you to check on who has been using the machine, and how often.

❐ They allow personalization of documents and printed reports. For example, if

you use Label Insertion and store your name with your Personal Code, the

receiver of your fax message will see your name at the top of the printout. This

eliminates the need for a cover page.

❐ They allow you to restrict use of the machine to authorized personnel only. If

you switch the Restricted Access feature on, users have to enter their personal

code before they can use the machine. The personal code must have already

been stored in the machine. This may deter unauthorized personnel from

casually using the machine.

Cross-references

Programming Personal Codes: see page 110.

Label Insertion: see page 120.

Restricted Access: see page 110.

TCR: see page 185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

If you input your Personal Code, your name will appear on the TCR and

Transmission Result Report.

1. Either:

❐ Press

↓

If you have programmed one of the

User Function Keys to activate this

feature, just press that key and go

to step 2.

❐

P ERS ONAL CODE

ENTER CODE

TO END

YES NO

2. Example: 7

P ERS ONAL CODE

P RES S

7 3 6 2

S MI TH

❐ The display shows the name that was

stored with the code that you selected. In

this example, it is SMITH.

3. Yes

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

❐ See page 110 for details on how to program

the Personal Codes and their labels.

Send Later

Using this feature, you can instruct the machine to delay transmission of your fax

message until a later time, which you specify. This allows you to take advantage

of off-peak telephone line charges without having to be by the machine at the time.

CAUTION

If your machine’s memory is full, you will have to keep the message in the

document feeder. This means that nobody can use the document feeder

unless they remove your document. This would automatically cancel the Send

Later operation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

1. Press

↓

S END LATER

NOW

ENTER S TART TI ME

AM/ P M:

1 2 : 1 5 P M

TO END

YES

2. Example: Send at 11:30 pm

S END LATER

TODAY

P RES S

1 1 : 3 0

P M AM/ P M:

❐ To change AM to PM or the other way

around, press

3. Yes

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

❐ The Send Later time cannot be more

than 24 hours into the future.

Transmission Deadline (TRD)

If your message has to be sent to the other end before a certain time, use the

Transmission Deadline option and input this deadline.

If the line is busy, the machine will redial at set intervals either until the message

gets through or until the deadline passes. Before the deadline passes, there is no

limit to the number of times that the machine can redial.

After the deadline passes, the machine will print a report which indicates whether

or not your message was sent within the deadline. Then, the message will be

erased from memory.

This feature is only available with Memory Transmission.

Cross-reference

Transmission Deadline Report: see page 187.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

1. Press

↓

TRD

ENTER TRD TI ME

AM/ P M:

TO END

NOW

1 2 : 1 5 P M

YES

2. Example: The deadline is 12:50 pm.

P RES S

TODAY

1 2 : 5 0 P M AM/ P M:

❐ The TRD time cannot be more than 24 hours

into the future.

❐ To change AM to PM or the other way

around, press

3. Yes

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

Page Count (Immediate Transmission only)

When your fax message is printed at the other end, page numbers will be printed

on the top of each page. Using the Page Count feature, you can select the format

in which the page numbers are printed.

If you use Page Count:

❐ Page numbers will be printed in batch-numbering format (for example, p1/3,

p2/3, and p3/3 for a three-page message). This makes it easy for the other

party to see how many pages you sent, and if any are missing. However, you

have to input the number of pages at the keypad before sending.

If you do not use Page Count:

❐ Page numbers will be printed only as a sequence (for example, p1, p2, p3).

This makes it difficult for the other party to tell at a glance whether any pages

are missing (for example, due to a double feed in your machine’s document

feeder).

Note: If you do not select Immediate Transmission, Page Count is automatically

switched on, and the pages are counted automatically.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

1. Press

↓

P AGE COUNT

S ET COUNT

P AGE( S )

TO END

2. Example: 10 pages

YES

P AGE COUNT

P RES S

1 0

P AGE( S )

3. Yes

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

Auto Reduce

If the fax message that you are sending is wider than the printer paper in the

receiving machine, the condition of the printout at the other end depends on

whether or not Auto Reduce is switched on. (It is switched on in a new machine at

the factory.)

If Auto Reduce is on:

❐ Your machine will reduce the image so that it will fit on the printer paper.

❐ During transmission, the display panel will inform you of the type of reduction

that is being done. For example, "B4 TO A4 TRANS MI T" means that your

B4-width [10.1"] original is being reduced to A4-width [8.3"] before being sent

out.

If you have switched Auto Reduce off:

❐ Your machine will not reduce the image. Parts of your image at the left and

right edges will not be printed at the other end. However, the central part of the

document will be printed without any reduction.

On/ Off Selection Switch

1. Press

↓

YES

OP TI ON S ELECT

AUTO REDUCE

TO END

OF F

TTI

2. If you wish to change the AUTO REDUCE setting, press ← or

→

until the

displayed setting is correct.

3. Yes when you have finished.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

Auto Reduce Home Position Adjustment

You can change the home position of the Auto Reduce setting if you wish. Do not

do this unless the current home position is inconvenient for you, and you often

find yourself having to change the Auto Reduce setting before sending a fax.

The procedure is as follows (see page 10 for more information about the User

Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

❐ At this time, you can print a User

Parameter List if you press

→

Start .

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 04

are shown. You need to change digit 2.

Digit 2

0: Auto Reduce is Off

1: Auto Reduce is On.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 2 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

TTI

Normally, the TTI programmed in your machine is printed at the top of each of the

pages you transmit when they are received at the other end. The top of the image

will be overprinted if there is no margin at the top of the transmitted page.

In some cases, you may wish the other party to receive an unmarked copy of your

original. In this case, you can switch TTI off.

Note: If you switch TTI off, make sure that Label Insertion is also off if you want

the image received at the other end to be unmarked.

Cross-reference

TTI: see page 26.

Label Insertion: see page 120

1. Either:

❐ Press

↓

If you have previously

programmed this feature as a

User Function Key, press that

key.

❐

YES

OP TI ON S ELECT

TO END

OF F

AUTO REDUCE

TTI

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

2. Press

↓

until "TTI

OF F "is displayed.

If you wish to change the TTI setting, press ← or

→

until the displayed

setting is correct.

3. Yes when you have finished.

ID Transmission

You must have stored an ID Code before you can use this feature; see page 85.

If you switch ID Transmission on, transmission will only take place if the other

terminal’s ID Code is the same as yours. This feature can stop you from

accidentally sending information to the wrong place, if you co-ordinate ID Codes

with the other party.

This feature works in the same way as Closed Network. To enable Closed

Network, you must have it switched on by a service technician; it then stays on for

all communications until you have it switched off. However, you can use ID

Transmission for whichever transmissions you like. For receptions, ID

Transmission does not work; you will have to use Closed Network if you wish to

use this type of feature for your received fax messages.

ID Transmission may not be reliable when communicating with terminals

produced by another maker.

Cross-reference

ID Code: see page 85.

Closed Network: see page 121.

1. Press

↓

YES

OP TI ON S ELECT

AUTO REDUCE

TO END

OF F

TTI

2. Press

↓

until "I D TRANS MI T

OF F "is displayed.

If you wish to change the I D TRANS MI T setting, press ← or

→

until the

displayed setting is correct.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

3. Yes when you have finished.

Economy Transmission

This feature is similar to Send Later. However, it has the added bonus of

automatically combining two cost-saving features: use of off-peak rates, and

Batch Transmission. Also, you do not have to input the required transmission time

every time, like you do with Send Later. However, with Send Later, you can input

a different time of transmission for each fax message.

If you select Economy Transmission, your fax message will be sent at the time

that you previously stored for this feature using Function 74 (see the next page).

Also, all messages that were stored for sending to the same destination using this

feature will be batched automatically.

Cross-reference

Send Later: see page 60.

Batch Transmission: see page 124.

On/ Off Selection Switch

1. Either:

❐ Press

↓

If you have previously

programmed this feature as a

User Function Key, press that

key.

❐

YES

OP TI ON S ELECT

TO END

OF F

AUTO REDUCE

TTI

2. Press

↓

until "ECONOMY TRANS .

OF F " is displayed.

If you wish to change the ECONOMY TRANS . setting, press ← or

→

until

the displayed setting is correct.

3. Yes when you have finished.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Storing the Economy Transmission Time

Before using Economy Transmission, you must use Function 74 to program a

time for Economy Transmissions to start. This should be the start of the off-peak

rate period for your area. After you have stored this, you will not need to change it

again until your telephone company changes the starting time of the off-peak rate

period.

1. Function

ECONOMY TX

TI ME= 1 1 : 0 0 AM

YES

TO END

2. Input the time that you always wish Economy Transmissions to start.

❐ To change from AM to PM and vice versa, press

or # .

3. Press Yes Function when the display is correct.

Voice Request (This feature requires a handset)

Using this feature, you can have a telephone conversation with the other party, on

the same call, after your fax message has been sent out. This is useful if you wish

to discuss the contents of the fax message with the other party.

You can save overall telephone line costs because you don’t have to redial the

other party to have the conversation.

Note: This feature cannot be used with Memory Transmission.

The following procedure tells you how to set up a Voice Request. However, refer

to "Talk After Sending a Fax" on page 80 for details on how to answer the phone

when it rings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

1. Press

↓

YES

OP TI ON S ELECT

AUTO REDUCE

TO END

OF F

TTI

2. Press

↓

until "VOI CE REQUES T

OF F " is displayed.

If you wish to change the VOI CE REQUES T setting, press ← or

→

until

the displayed setting is correct.

3. Yes when you have finished.

Direct Fax Number Entry

This feature allows you to input destination fax numbers before placing the

document in the feeder. This is useful when you would like to read the destination

fax number off the document without having to write it down on the reverse side or

on another scrap of paper.

1. Either:

❐

Function

❐

If you have previously

programmed this feature as a

User Function Key, press that

key.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

2. Input the destination telephone num-

ber(s).

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

P RES S YES OR CLR

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

3. Place your document in the feeder and

press Start .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Immediate Transmission

Procedure

If you do not wish to store the fax message in memory before sending it out, use

the following procedure.

❐ The merits and demerits of Immediate Transmission and Memory Transmission

are discussed on pages 47 and 48.

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49).

2. Memory

❐ The Memory indicator should go out.

3. Place the document face down into the

I MMEDI ATE TX

OP TI ONS

feeder.

ENTER F AX NUMBER

4. Dial (only one destination).

I MMEDI ATE TX

YES

CLR

P RES S

See page 50 for how to dial.

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

DI ALI NG

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

F I LE NO. 0 0 4 6

5. Start

6. The machine dials and the line to the other party is connected. The number

that you dialed is displayed (or if you used Quick Dial or Speed Dial, the

Quick Dial or Speed Dial Label stored for that number is displayed).

Converting Immediate Transmission to Memory Transmission

If there is a message still waiting in the document feeder, you can convert it into a

memory file if you press Memory Start . The document will be scanned and

stored into memory, leaving the document feeder free for others to use.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

Transmission Mode Home Position Adjustment

The default mode of your machine is Memory Transmission. If you wish, you can

change this home position to Immediate Transmission.

The procedure is as follows (see page 10 if you need more information about the

User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

TO END

❐ At this time, you can print a User

Parameter List if you press

→

Start .

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

The setting that you need to change is

that for digit 5.

Digit 5

0: Memory Transmission

1: Immediate Transmission

3. If you wish to change the setting, press 5 .

4. Finish: Yes Function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Using the Stamp

If press the Stamp key to light the Stamp indicator, the machine stamps the

bottom of each page. During memory transmission, the stamp indicates that the

page was successfully stored. For immediate transmission, it shows that the page

was sent successfully. You must switch the stamp on before you press Start , or

the machine will not stamp the first page.

❐ If you wish the stamp to be at the top of each page instead of at the bottom,

contact your service representative.

Changing the Stamp Home Position Setting

If you wish to change the Stamp home position setting, do the following.

(See page 10 if you need more information about the User Parameter settings

adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

❐ At this time, you can print a User

Parameter List if you press

→

Start .

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

The setting that you need to change is

that for digit 0.

Digit 0

0: The stamp home position is "Off".

If you press the Stamp key to use

the Stamp, the Stamp will be

disabled at the end of the

3. If you wish to change the setting, press 0 .

4. Finish: Yes Function

transmission.

1: The stamp home position is "On".

After the transmission, the Stamp

will stay enabled.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

ROUTINE OPERATION

Redialing

If a message was not transmitted successfully, that does not mean that you have

to enter the telephone number again. In many cases, the machine will redial the

destination automatically. Or, with the AI Redial key, you can redial with just a few

keystrokes.

Automatic Redialing

The machine will automatically redial the other party if any of the following

conditions occurred.

❐ The other party was busy

❐ There was no reply from the other party

❐ The message was rejected by the machine at the other end because of

excessive errors (in this case, redialing will only take place if Memory

Transmission was used)

Redialing is done 4 times at 5 minute intervals (for a memory transmission) or 2

times at 2 minute intervals (for an immediate transmission).

❐ The number of redials and the redial interval may be adjusted by a service

technician.

During redialing, the number being dialed is

displayed in brackets at the top of the

screen, as shown on the right.

[

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 ]

MEMORY TRANS .

S ET DOCUMENT

AP R. 4 . 1 2 : 2 5 P M

MEMORY 9 9 %

If redialing fails for an immediate

transmission, the display appears as shown

opposite. You can convert this

REDI AL S TANDBY

OR S ELECT MEMORY MODE

( P RES S MEMORY + S TART)

communication to a memory transmission to

free up the machine for other users.

Press Memory then Start.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

SENDING A FAX MESSAGE

Using the AI (Artificial Intelligence) Redial Key

The machine learns and remembers the last 10 telephone numbers that you

input. Then, if you have to redial one of these numbers, just press the AI Redial

key until the number or name of the party you wish to redial is displayed, then

press the Start key.

This feature has the following uses.

❐ If the machine is waiting to redial the other party, you do not have to wait for the

redialing interval to expire.

Press the AI Redial key until the required telephone number or name is

displayed, then press the Start key.

❐ If you wish to send another message to the same address that you just sent

one to recently, you don’t have to dial the full number again if it is still in the AI

Redial memory.

Place the message in the feeder, then press the AI Redial key until the required

telephone number or name is displayed, then press the Start key.

Notes: ❐ Using AI Redial, you cannot retry a failed Memory Transmission.

However, you can redial the telephone number, as explained above.

❐ AI Redial employs the AI Short Protocol feature.

❐ The AI Redial key does not work if you used the handset to dial.

Cross-reference

AI Short Protocol: see page 184.

To send a fax using AI Redial, do the following:

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49).

2. Place your document into the feeder.

3. AI Redial

AI REDI AL NO. DI RECTORY

S CROLL P RES S

YES

0 1 XYZ CO. NEW YORK

4. Scroll through the numbers in the AI

Redial memory using the

arrows of the scroll key.

↑

and

↓

❐ To select a number: Yes x 2

MEMORY TRANS .

ENTER NO. OR

OP TI ONS

DES T:

START

5. Either

❐ Select another number: go to step 4.

❐ Start the transmission: Start

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING FAX MESSAGES

ROUTINE OPERATION

RECEIVING FAX MESSAGES

Selecting the Reception Mode

There are two ways to set up your machine to receive fax messages.

❐ Auto Receive Mode

❐ Manual Receive Mode

Press the reception mode key to switch between the modes.

Manual Receive Mode

This mode is selected when the Manual Receive indicator is lit.

This setting is convenient if you wish to use your fax machine’s handset to answer

telephone calls coming in on the same line as fax messages. However, your fax

machine cannot automatically receive fax messages; you have to be by the

machine if a fax message comes in.

The machine operates as follows.

1. The machine rings continuously until you answer the call. Pick up the handset.

2. If you hear a voice from the other end, speak in reply.

If you hear a tone every few seconds, the other end is a fax terminal.

Note: Remove any documents that are in the feeder.

3. If the person at the other end wishes to send you a fax message,

press Start to receive the message. Then hang up the handset.

4. The machine starts to receive the message.

The Communicating indicator lights.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

RECEIVING FAX MESSAGES

Auto Receive Mode

This mode is selected when the Auto Receive indicator is lit.

Incoming faxes are received automatically. You do not have to be by the machine

if the power switch is kept on. Use this mode when you must leave the machine.

1. The telephone rings once.

2. The machine automatically starts to receive the message.

Substitute Reception

Overview

If the printer is jammed or out of supplies, you will still be able to receive fax

messages; any messages coming in will be stored in the machine’s memory.

If the "Receive File" indicator is lit, a message has been stored in the memory

using the Substitute Reception feature.

Check the following:

❐ The printer paper may be used up. If so, add paper: see page 194.

❐ The toner may have finished. If so, add toner: see page 195.

❐ The printer paper may have jammed. If so, remove the jam: see page 215.

❐ If the Call Service indicator is lit, your machine needs to be repaired.

❐ If there appears to be no problem, somebody may be making copies while a

fax message is coming in.

The messages received into memory will be printed and erased after the machine

has been returned to normal operation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEIVING FAX MESSAGES

ROUTINE OPERATION

Switching Substitute Reception On or Off

There are two conditions under which you may wish to disable this feature.

❐ If you do not like keeping received fax messages in memory: After your

machine has received a fax message to memory, it sends an OK signal to the

other end. However, if something happens to your machine and you lose the

fax message before you have a chance to read it, the sender will not be

informed. Therefore, you may not wish to use the Substitute Reception feature.

❐ If you do not wish to have your memory full of mail from unknown

senders: If you have not enabled the Authorized Reception feature, you can

receive fax messages from anybody. However, you can see who they are from

because their identifier (the TTI) is printed at the top of each page. If the other

party has not programmed their identifiers (perhaps in an attempt to hide their

identity), you may not wish to receive their messages into memory, which

would take up valuable space.

Cross-reference

ECM: see page 123.

Authorized Reception: see page 132.

If you wish to switch Substitute Reception on or off, do the following procedure.

(See page 10 if you need more information about the User Parameter settings

adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

❐ At this time, you can print a User Parame-

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

ter List if you press

→

Start

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 05

are shown.

The settings that you need to change

are those for digits 0 and 3.

The meanings of these settings are as follows.

Digit

Purpose

Substitute Reception under all circumstances (for example, if you have limited

memory space) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Reception to memory (including Substitute Reception, Memory Lock, Forwarding,

and Transfer Requests from another station) when no RTI or CSI identifiers were

received from the other party

0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 0 or 3 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

TELEPHONE CALLS

A handset is required to execute the procedures in this section.

You can use your fax machine for dialing in the same way as you would use a

telephone. This is useful when calling fax machines that are usually kept in

Manual Receive Mode, as well as for telephone conversations.

❐ You can dial using Quick Dial Keys or Speed Dial Codes.

❐ With the On Hook Dial feature, you do not have to pick up the handset before

dialing.

❐ You can send a fax message after finishing the conversation, without having to

make a new call.

Cross-reference

Manual Receive Mode: see page 74.

Making a Telephone Call

Using On Hook Dial

Using On Hook Dial is like using the handset (see the next page), except that you

do not have to pick it up before dialing. Just press the On Hook Dial key, and dial

the number. When you hear the other party on the fax machine’s built-in speaker,

you can pick up the handset. This keeps both hands free for referring to telephone

numbers while you are dialing.

1. On Hook Dial

ON HOOK MODE

Note: Do not pick up the handset.

2. Dial.

See page 50 for how to dial.

Do not use the handset.

Note: Do not press Start .

ON HOOK MODE

START

P RES S

AF TER TONE

❐ If you wish to cancel the call,

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

press On Hook Dial

3. Listen to your machine’s built-in speaker. When the other party answers, pick

up the handset.

4. Replace the handset when you have finished.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TELEPHONE CALLS

ROUTINE OPERATION

Using the Handset

Using the fax machine’s built-in or optional handset, you can use the fax machine

in the same way as a normal telephone. Pick up the handset and dial on the fax

machine’s ten-key pad (or use a Quick Dial Key or Speed Dial Code if you wish).

1. Pick up the handset.

HANDS ET MODE

2. Dial.

See page 50 for how to dial.

Note: Do not press Start .

HANDS ET MODE

START

P RES S

AF TER TONE

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

3. Continue as for a normal telephone conversation.

Using AI Redial

Use AI Redial if you wish to redial a number that you dialed recently.

AI REDI AL NO. DI RECTORY

1. On Hook Dial AI Redial

YES NO

S CROLL

P RES S

0 1 XYZ CO. NEW YORK

2. Scroll through the numbers in the AI

Redial memory using the

arrows of the scroll key.

↑

and

↓

When the correct number is displayed,

press Yes .

❐ The number will be dialed immediately.

ON HOOK MODE

START

P RES S

AF TER TONE

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROUTINE OPERATION

TELEPHONE CALLS

Answering the Telephone

If the telephone rings just once:

A fax is coming in. Do not pick up the handset.

If the telephone rings continuously:

1. Pick up the handset and speak to the other party.

❐ If you hear a high-pitched tone, a fax is coming in.

Press Start then hang up.

2. If the caller wants to send you a fax, press Start after speaking.

Then hang up.

❐ If nothing happens after you press Start , the power may be switched off or the

telephone may not be connected up correctly.

Phoning and Faxing on the Same Call

To Talk Before Sending a Fax (On Hook Dial)

1. On Hook Dial

2. Dial.

Note: Do not use the handset.

Do not press Start .

3. If you hear a voice from the machine’s built-in speaker, pick up the handset

and speak to the other party.

❐ If you hear a high-pitched tone instead of a voice, place your fax message in the feeder,

then press Start

4. When you are ready to send your fax message, place your message in the

feeder, then ask the other party to press Start .

5. When you hear a high-pitched tone, press Start .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TELEPHONE CALLS

ROUTINE OPERATION

6. Replace the handset.

❐ Do not replace the handset if you wish to speak to the other party again.

When your machine emits a tone, press Stop then speak.

To Talk After Sending a Fax

Use the Voice Request option (see page 67). Then, during transmission:

1. When your machine emits a tone, pick up the handset, press Stop and

speak.

❐ If the machine did not emit a tone, the other party did not answer the call.

2. After speaking, hang up.

❐ Do not hang up if you have more pages to send. Instead:

1. Place the pages into the feeder.

2. Ask the other party to press Start

3. When you hear a high-pitched tone, press Start

Speaker and Buzzer Volume Adjustments

Your machine has a built in speaker. With this speaker, you can listen to the

telephone line without picking up the handset. The speaker will be automatically

switched off just before the start of facsimile data communication.

When you are sending a fax message, you will be able to hear the line after the

machine has dialed. If the line is busy, you can press the Stop key and start

another operation without having to wait for the machine to disconnect the line.

If the speaker volume is not satisfactory, you can adjust it.

1. Function

MONI TOR VOLUME

TRANS MI S S I ON:

S ET VOLUME

> > > >

START

YES

P RES S

TO END

2. ❐ Increase:

→

❐ Decrease:

←

❐ Test the current setting: Start .

Press Stop when you have

finished the test.

❐ Accept: Yes

MONI TOR VOLUME

RECEP TI ON:

S ET VOLUME

> > > >

START

YES

P RES S

TO END

3. Repeat step 2 for each adjustment that

appears on the screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

Overview

This section explains how you can use this machine to distribute fax messages

over networks of fax machines.

As we have seen (Sending to More Than One Location, page 51), you can send

the same fax message directly from your machine to more than one location. The

diagram in that section shows your machine sending the same fax to three

locations. This feature is commonly known as Broadcasting.

However, with Broadcasting, you or your organization has to pay for three fax

calls. If these are all long distance calls, that can be quite expensive. If you use

the networking features provided with this machine, you will be able to reduce

costs by sending the fax message only once, to a Transfer Station, and that

Transfer Station will distribute your fax message.

Networking using a

Transfer Station

Broadcasting

(Transfer Request)

You can take advantage of your machine’s Group Dial, Broadcasting, and

Transfer Request features to set up extensive facsimile networks. Such networks

can save time and cost if you set them up to perform commonly-used

broadcasting operations, especially if long-distance communications are involved.

Cross-references

Groups: see page 30.

Broadcasting: see page 51.

Transfer Request: see page 87.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

What Networking Features Does This Machine Have?

The machine’s networking features are summarized below.

❐ Transfer Request: This allows you to send a fax message to a number of

destinations via a single Transfer Station (see page 87). Transfer Request can

be combined with Broadcasting to set up more complex networks (see page

90).

❐ Two-step Transfer: This process adds a Relaying Terminal between you and

the Transfer Station. The Relaying Terminal could be a machine in your area

that has access to a long-distance high-speed digital link, which would pass on

your fax message to the Transfer Station, which would then distribute your fax

message over low-speed local lines. See page 91 for details on this feature.

❐ Multi-step Transfer: This allows you to set up a string of Transfer Stations in

different areas. The Transfer Station in each area would distribute your

message to destinations in the same area, and pass on your message to the

next Transfer Station in the chain. See page 93 for more on this feature.

When you look at these procedures later in this section, they may seem rather

complex. However, once you have decided upon a certain operation, and if you

plan to use it frequently, program it as a Keystroke Program. Next time, this will

allow you to start the operation with only one keystroke.

Note

Your sales or service representative will be able to help make all the necessary group and

transfer station number programming in the various broadcasting terminals throughout your

proposed network. Please co-ordinate with your sales representative to obtain correct

programming at the time of installation.

Cross-references

Transfer Request: see page 87.

Transfer Request combined with Broadcasting: see page 90.

Two-step Transfer: see page 91.

Multi-step Transfer: see page 93.

Keystroke Programs: see page 99.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

Preparing the Machine for Networking Operations

Before you can start to set up fax communication networks, there are some items

that you have to program in your machine. These are as follows.

❐ Your Country Code

❐ Your Fax Machine’s Own Telephone Number

❐ Your Area Code Prefix (normally not necessary in the USA)

❐ The ID Code (the ID Code of your machine and all the Relaying Terminals and

Transfer Stations must be the same)

If you install the optional Group 4 ISDN kit, there are some other items that you

will have to program. These are dealt with in Appendix C, which covers the ISDN

kit.

You will also have to plan how you program your Groups (in co-ordination with

other people at other locations who will use your machine as a Transfer Station),

and you must also know how all the Relaying Terminals and Transfer Stations

have programmed their Groups.

Storing the Country Code

The Country Code is the code that callers in other countries have to input when

dialing a number inside your own country. For the USA, this code is ’1’.

COUNTRY CODE

1. Function

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

COUNTRY CODE

I D S ETTI NG

2. Yes

YES

TO END

3. Input only your country code. Do not in -

put your international dial access code.

Example: USA -

COUNTRY CODE

YES

CLR

4. Yes Function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

Storing your Machine’s Own Telephone Number

Store your fax terminal’s telephone number using this feature. If you do not do

this, you will not be able to use the Transfer Request feature.

If your fax machine’s telephone number changes, do not forget to change the

stored telephone number data.

1. Function

↓

OWN ANALOG NUMBER

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

OWN ANALOG NUMBER

2. Yes

YES

TO END

3. Input your fax terminal’s telephone number.

❐ The format of the number must be as follows:

International Dial Prefix, Your Country Code, Your Area Code, then you

must add a Pause, followed by your telephone number.

Check the International Dialing Prefix and the Country Code with your local

telecommunications operator. The example shown is for the USA; the

codes to add are 011 and 1.

NOTE: Use the Pause key to add a

OWN ANALOG NUMBER

YES

CLR

pause.

0 1 1 1 2 1 2 - 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

4. Yes Function

Storing your Area Code Prefix

The Area Code Prefix is the digit that is added to area codes when you dial

another area within your own country. In many countries, this code is just a zero.

In Spain, a ’9’ is used, and in the USA, the setting is just left blank.

1. Function

AREA CODE P REF I X

↓

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

2. Yes

AREA CODE P REF I X

2 1 2 - 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

YES

: 0 -

TO END

3. Input the area code prefix.

4. Yes Function

Storing the ID Code

Before programming the ID Code, confer with other users in your fax network to

agree on an ID Code. This is because communications using ID Codes will fail if

the codes are not the same.

The ID Code can be any four-digit code (using digits 0 to 9 and letters A to F),

except 0000 and FFFF.

In addition to the networking features described in this section, ID Codes are used

with the following communication features. The same code must be used by all

members of your fax network and all people you wish to communicate with using

these features.

❐ Polling: see page 153.

❐ Closed Network: see pages 121 and 152.

❐ ID Transmission: see page 65.

Features using ID Codes can only be used between terminals made by the same maker.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

To store an ID Code, do the following.

1. Function

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

I D CODE

YES

shown opposite.

TO S ET

TO CANCEL

P REVI OUS

2. Yes

I D CODE

I D S ETTI NG

YES

TO END

3. Input the ID Code that you will be using.

Example:

❐ Do not use 0000 or FFFF.

I D CODE

YES

CLR

4 3 6 3

4. Yes Function

Groups

The way to program a Group has already been explained and will not be repeated

here. See page 38 and the pages following that for all the procedu res. However,

there are two points to keep in mind when you are setting up Groups for

networking operations.

Limitations on the size of a Group: You can store up to 200 destinations in a

Group. However, the networking features can only handle Groups that have up to

30 destinations. If you are programming a Group for networking purposes, do not

put more than 30 numbers in that Group.

Group Transfer Station: You can specify a Group Transfer Station for each of

your Groups. Then another party can send you a fax message and instruct your

machine to send it to each number in a Group, through the Group Transfer

Station, which acts as a broadcaster. Your machine will then relay the fax

message to that group’s Group Transfer Station, which will then send the fax

message to each of the numbers stored in that Group. You should store Group

Transfer Stations for Groups that you wish to use with the Two-step and Multi-step

Transfer features. For instructions on how to store a Group Transfer Station for a

Group, see page 41.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

Transfer Request

Transfer Request helps you save costs when you send the same message to

more than one place in a distant area.

❐ Your machine sends the message to the Transfer Station, which holds it in

memory.

❐ The Transfer Station then sends it on to each of the End Receivers in

sequence.

❐ After broadcasting, the Transfer Station sends your machine a Transfer Result

Report to tell you if there were any problems with the communication.

Note: ❐ This feature can only be used if the Transfer Station was made by the

same maker as your machine.

❐ The ID Code of your machine must be the same as the ID Code of the

Transfer Station.

❐ Your fax machine’s telephone number must have been programmed in

advance.

❐ The Transfer Station must have memory space available, and must be

able to act as a Transfer Station (some machines cannot do this, or

can but the capability has been switched off).

You cannot dial the End Receivers as full numbers on your ten-key pad, and you

cannot use your own stored Speed Dials, Quick Dials, and Groups. You must use

the numbers that are stored in the Transfer Station. Always keep a copy of the

Transfer Station’s Telephone Lists (Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group Lists) near

the machine if you plan to use Transfer Request.

Cross-reference

Quick Dial and Speed Dial: see pages 29 and 31.

ID Code: see page 85.

Groups: see page 30.

Telephone Lists: see p. 192.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49).

2. Place your document in the feeder.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

3. Either:

❐

Function

If you have programmed one of

the User Function Keys to

activate this feature, press that

key and go to step 4.

❐

TRANS F ER

TRANS F .

OP TI ONS

❐ If you cannot use Function 12, you forgot to store your country code, your fax machine’s

telephone number, or your ID code (Function 61). See pages 83, 84, and 85.

❐ If you have installed the ISDN Option Kit, you must also program the machine’s Own

ISDN G4 and Own ISDN G3 numbers (use Function 61; see pages 233 and 234). Your

G4 Terminal ID and your ISDN subscriber numbers for G4 and G3 must also have been

stored (this is normally done by the service representative when installing the ISDN kit).

4. Input the telephone number of the first

transfer broadcasting station,

then press Yes .

❐ This machine must be. of the same

TRANS F ER

manufacturer as yours, and it must be

TRANS F .

RECV

1 2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

able to act as a Transfer Station.

Note: Do not use the handset.

5. Input the destinations for this transfer broadcaster.

You must use Quick Dials, Speed Dials, or Groups that are stored in the

transfer broadcaster. There is a shorthand notation for this purpose. See the

following examples:

❐ Quick Dial Key 01:

Yes

❐ Speed Dial Code 10:

Yes

❐ Group 01:

Yes

START

TRANS F ER

TRANS F .

RECV

NEXT NO. OR

1 2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

TRNS F .

NOTE: You can select up to 30 Transfer Stations, and up to 30 End

Receivers for each Transfer Station. (This number depends on how many

numbers are currently waiting in memory to be dialed. See the table on page

43 for more information concerning the limitations to this feature.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

6. Either:

❐ Enter more destinations for this transfer broadcaster - go to step 5.

❐ Input another transfer broadcaster and its destinations:

↓

- go to step 4.

❐ Start the transfer request: Start

NOTE: You may use some transmission options, such as Send Later.

See page 59.

If you wish your machine to be a Transfer Station for other parties to

use for their Transfer Requests, you must install a memory card or a

hard disk.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

Combining Transfer Request with Broadcasting

If you wish to set up complex fax message distribution networks, you can make a

Transfer Request using more than one Transfer Station. When you do this, you

can send the same message to up to 30 Transfer Stations, and each Transfer

Station can pass the message on to 30 End Receivers.

Los Angeles

Boston

San

Francisco

Hartford

Philadelphia

Buffalo

New York

Atlantic City

Dallas

Seattle

New

Orleans

Houston

Oklahoma

City

Assume that your machine is in San Francisco and you wish to send the same

message to various locations in the U.S.A. Of course, doing a simple broadcast,

sending to each terminal directly from your machine, would get the job done, but

you would not be taking advantage of the cost-cutting features of the machine.

However, if you incorporate Transfer Request, as shown below, your machine

would only make 4 calls, instead of the 10 that would be necessary if Transfer

Request was not used. This saves costs.

❐ Your machine can play any part in a Transfer Request network of this type,

provided that you have programmed all the required features as explained

earlier in this section.

❐ The ID codes of the requester (San Francisco) and the Transfer Stations (New

York and Houston) must be the same. The requester must have its own fax

number programmed.

❐ The model used by the requester (San Francisco) must be able to make

Transfer Requests through more than one Transfer Station.

❐ Reports indicating success or failure will be returned to San Francisco from the

terminals in Houston and New York.

To do this procedure, use the broadcasting procedure on page 51. The

destinations should be as follows:

❐ Los Angeles

❐ Seattle

❐ A Group containing Boston, Hartford, Philadelphia, Buffalo, and Atlantic City,

with New York as the Group Transfer Station

❐ A Group containing Dallas, New Orleans, and Oklahoma City, with Houston as

the Group Transfer Station

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

Two-step Transfer

Transfer

Station

Relaying

Terminal

Osaka

Digital Link

DIGITAL (G4)

PSTN (G3)

Nagoya

Tokyo

San Francisco

Sacramento

Terminal A

makes a transfer

request

Transfer

Stn. = B

Transfer

Stn. = C

Yokohama

If your machine (A), in Sacramento in the above example, does not have access

to a digital network, it can use a digital link between San Francisco (B) and Tokyo

communication and reduces costs. Terminals B and C must be G4 fax machines

from the same manufacturer, must have the Two-step Transfer feature, and must

have programmed a number known as the Next Transfer Station.

The Next Transfer Station is a feature that is provided when you install the optional G4 ISDN

kit. For details on this feature and how to program it, see page 235.

To start the operation, the user at terminal A makes a transfer request, specifying

terminal B as the transfer station and stations D to F as end receivers. B will send

the message to C, and C will then distribute it to D, E, and F.

Note that the following programming must be done in terminals B and C if

Two-step Transfer is to work using a digital link.

❐ The ID codes of terminals A, B, and C must be the same.

❐ The fax number of terminal C must be stored in terminal B as the Next Transfer

Station.

❐ The fax number of terminal B must be stored in terminal C as the Next Transfer

Station.

❐ Terminals B and C may need adjustment; contact a service technician.

If the line between A and B is Group 3 (analog), then the lines from C to D, C to

E, and C to F must also be Group 3, unless the operation was done using

Groups stored in terminal C; in that case, the destinations (D, E, F) can be a

mixture of Group 3 and Group 4 terminals.

If the line between A and B is digital, the destinations can be a mixture of Group 3

and Group 4 terminals.

Cross-reference

Transfer Request: see page 87.

ID Code: see page 85.

Next Transfer Station: see page 235.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

Analog Link

Two-step Transfer can also be done if the link between terminals B and C is

analog (Group 3 on the PSTN).

PSTN (G3)

Terminal B: Group 01

Terminal D

Terminal E

Dials #**01

(Transfer

Terminal F

Group Transfer Stn. = C

The operator at terminal A makes a transfer request. However, it must dial using a

group stored in terminal B, using the shorthand notation described for Transfer

Request on page 88. For example, if the required group in terminal B is group 1,

terminal A must dial # ∗∗01.

Note that the following programming must be done if Two-step Transfer is to work

using an analog link.

❐ The ID codes of terminals A, B, and C must be the same.

❐ Terminals D, E, and F must be programmed in a group at terminal B (for

example, Group 1). Terminal C must be programmed as the Group Transfer

Station for that group (see page 41).

Caution

If terminal C is not programmed in terminal B as the transfer station for the

group, the message will be sent out to D, E, and F using terminal B as the

broadcaster. If the link between B and C is long-distance, this would not be

much help in reducing your communication costs, as you can see from the

diagram.

Cross-reference

Transfer Request: see page 87.

ID Code: see page 85.

Group Transfer Station: see page 41.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

Multi-step Transfer

The principles of the Two-step Transfer feature can be used to build up a

multi-step facsimile network. This will work using either analog (Group 3) or digital

(Group 4) lines. An example follows.

Terminal C: Group 1

Terminals I and J

Group Transfer Stn. = D

Terminal C: Group 2

Terminals E, F, G, and H

Dials

#**01

Terminal B: Group 01

#**01

(Transfer

Request)

#**02

Group Transfer Stn. = C

To set up this network, the following programming must be done:

❐ Terminal C must contain two preprogrammed groups. Group 1 must contain

terminals I and J. Group 2 must contain terminals E, F, G, and H. In Group 1,

terminal D must be specified as the Group Transfer Station.

❐ Terminal B must contain a preprogrammed group (Group 1). This group must

contain two numbers, # ∗∗01, and #∗∗02. These specify transfer using groups 1

and 2 that are stored in the Group Transfer Station. In Group 1, C must be

specified as the Group Transfer Station.

❐ The ID codes of terminals A, B, C, and D must be the same.

To start the operation, terminal A does a transfer request using terminal B as the

broadcaster and #∗∗01 as the end receiver; this specifies transmission to the

numbers stored in Group 1 at terminal B.

Cross-reference

Group Transfer Station: see page 41.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

Your Machine as a Transfer Station (Memory Card or Hard Disk

Required)

Your machine can be a Transfer Station for other people to use for their Transfer

Requests.

If the requesting party is using a machine of the same manufacturer as your

machine, they must perform the Transfer Request procedure given after page 87.

Any requesting party must have the same ID Code as your machine’s.

However, if the requesting party is using a machine made by another

manufacturer, or if they couldn’t get the Transfer Request procedure to work, you

will have to set up the Transfer Request by Tonal Signals feature in your machine

(see below).

❐ If you do not wish to have your machine available as a Transfer Station,

contact a service technician and ask to have this feature switched off.

❐ Another way to restrict use of this feature is to make sure that all requesting

parties must have their identifiers stored, so that you do not receive Transfer

Requests from unknown parties. See the bottom of page 131 for more details

on this.

Transfer Request by Tonal Signals

This feature allows your machine to accept Transfer Requests made from the

requesting side using Dial Tones. An operation of this type can succeed only if the

following conditions have been met.

❐ The requester’s fax machine must be connected to a telephone line that can

accept DTMF (tone dial) signals, or must be able to generate Tonal Signals

(see page 115).

❐ Your fax machine’s reception mode must be Auto Receive.

❐ Your fax machine’s remote ID must have been programmed.

❐ Transfer Request by Tonal Signals must have been switched on.

Setting the Machine up for Transfer Request by Tonal Signals

You must do the following to use this feature:

❐ Set up the machine in Auto Receive mode (see page 74).

❐ Program the Remote ID (Function 61, see below)

The other party will have to enter this code every time they access your

machine to make a Transfer Request using a machine that is not of the same

manufacturer as this machine.

❐ Switch Transfer Request by Tonal Signals On (Function 91, see below).

In a new machine, it is switched on in the factory.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

Storing the Remote ID

As a new machine has a Remote ID of 0000 when it leaves the factory, we

recommend that you store a new Remote ID immediately.

1. Function

REMOTE I D

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

shown opposite.

YES

TO S ET

TO CANCEL

P REVI OUS

REMOTE I D

2. Yes

I D S ETTI NG

YES

0 0 0 0

TO END

3. Input the Remote ID that you will be us -

ing. Example:

REMOTE I D

YES

CLR

6 7 5 4

4. Yes Function

Switching Transfer Request by Tonal Signals On/Off

To switch this feature on or off, do the following. (See page 10 for more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 03

are shown.

Digit 2

The setting you need to use is digit 2.

0: The feature is disabled.

1: The feature is enabled.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 2 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

Procedure for Transfer Request by Tonal Signals

If an operator of a machine of a different manufacturer than yours wishes to use

your machine as a Transfer Station, they will have to do the following procedure.

Full Procedure

A quick reference version of this procedure is given on the next page.

1. First, the requesting party must dial your fax machine using an external

telephone.

2. Immediately after hearing fax tones from your machine, they must press

The tone will stop, and a single high-pitched beep of about one second dura -

tion will be heard. This is an ACK tone (Acknowledgment).

# .

3. The requesting party must then enter your Remote ID then press # .

❐ See the notes at the bottom of the next page.

4. After hearing an ACK tone, they must press

5. After hearing an ACK tone, they must press

# .

6. After hearing an ACK tone, they must dial the number which the Transfer

Result Report must go to (their own terminal). This must be programmed in

your machine as a Speed Dial or Quick Dial.

The requesting party has to dial the end receivers in the shorthand format

used for Transfer Request (see the quick reference procedure on the next

page for an example). Then they must press # .

For example:

❐ Quick Dial Code 01:

❐ Speed Dial Code 01:

❐ Group 01:

7. After hearing an ACK tone, the requesting party must enter the telephone num -

ber of the first fax terminal that they wish to receive the fax message, then

press # . This number must also be input in the Transfer Request shorthand

notation style.

8. The requesting party must repeat step 7 for all the end receiver numbers. If

there are no more numbers, the requesting party should press

# twice.

9. Communication begins after three ACK tones. When the requesting party

hears fax tones again, they must press Start on their fax machine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

NETWORKING

Example Procedure (for Quick Reference)

❐ Remote ID: 1111

❐ Transfer Result Report Destination: Speed Dial 04 in your machine.

❐ End Receivers, as programmed in your machine: Quick Dial 01, Speed Dial 02,

Group Dial 03.

1. The requesting party must dial your machine using an external telephone, and

wait for the fax tones.

2. When the fax tones come in, the requesting party must immediately input the

following sequence. (ACK: Wait for the ACK tone)

1111#

24#

***

*04#

01#

*02#

**03#

ACK

End Receiver:

Speed Dial 02

Transfer Result

Report Destination:

Speed Dial 04

Your Machine’s

Remote ID Code

End Receiver:

Group Dial 03

End Receiver:

Quick Dial 01

3. When the requesting party hears fax tones again, they must press Start.

Notes

❐ The remote ID code must have been programmed earlier.

❐ After entering the ID code, if there is an interval of more than 5 seconds

followed by three short beeps repeated three times, enter the remote ID again.

❐ If you enter the wrong remote ID, you will hear three short beeps. Try to enter

the code again. If you enter the wrong code five times, the remote control

services will not be available until you go back to the machine and reprogram

the ID (this is a security measure to prevent other people getting access to

your machine).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NETWORKING

ADVANCED FEATURES

Beep Tones

Sometimes during a Remote Transfer, you may hear one or more beeps. The

following table explains the meanings of these signals.

Sound

One high beep

A short beep three times

Reason

Acknowledgment

Rejection

Required Action

No problem; keep going.

Operation error. Try again. Also see

the third note on the previous page.

No problem; keep going.

A high beep three times

A mixed beep five times

Service code accepted

Service code rejected

Operation error. Input the correct

code.

A mixed beep five times

followed by two high beeps

Three short beeps repeated Wrong Remote ID code.

three times

Transfer destination fax

number rejected

Input another fax number for the

destination of the remote transfer.

Input the correct Remote ID.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Keystroke Programs

Overview

If you regularly transmit to a particular destination or set of destinations using the

same features, you can save a lot of repetitive keypad operation by storing the

features and destinations in a Keystroke Program.

Keystroke Programs are stored as Quick Dial Keys.

❐ If you store a Keystroke Program into a Quick Dial Key, that Quick Dial Key

cannot be used for any other purpose.

❐ Be sure to store your Keystroke Program in a vacant Quick Dial Key.

Example: Let us say that you normally send a daily report to locations A, B, and

C at 11 pm (using Send Later). Store these instructions as a Keystroke Program.

Then every day, you will only have to place the report in the document feeder,

then press that key to set up the transmission.

Cross-reference

Send Later: see page 60.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Storing a Keystroke Program

1. Make sure that the machine is in

standby mode (see page 49).

2. Place a sheet of paper in the feeder.

❐ Skip step 2 if you are making a Polling

Reception program.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

3. Select all required features (such as

Transfer Request) and telephone num -

bers as you would normally do.

❐ Contrast, resolution, and halftone cannot

be stored in a keystroke program.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

DES T:

START

ENTER NO. OR

4. Press the Quick Dial key that you wish

to store the program in.

Example: 01

❐ Make sure that this key is vacant.

P ROGRAM?

YES

5. To complete the program: Yes

Note: The procedure that you just stored will now begin. If you do not

wish to use the procedure now, press Stop immediately.

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Labeling a Program

If you store a label for your keystroke programs, the label will appear on the

display when you use the program. Also, you can attach an adhesive label to the

Quick Dial Key if you wish.

1. Function

P ROGRAM

CHOOS E KEY

❐ If you press

→

Start , a

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

Program List will be printed.

2. Press the Quick Dial key that holds the

program that you wish to label.

Example:

01 Yes

P ROGRAM

0 8

ENTER LABEL

ABC

YES

CLR

P ROGRAM

0 8

3. Input your label, using the Quick Dial

keys.

TRANS MI T DAI LY REP ORT

Inputting labels: see page 7.

4. Yes

P ROGRAM

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

5. Either:

❐ Label another program: Go to step 2.

❐ Return to standby: Function

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Using a Program

Before using a program, make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see

page 49 for details).

Transmission Program

1. Place your document in the feeder.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

2. Press the programmed Quick Dial Key.

❐ The program begins at once, or at the

later time specified by the program. You

do not need to press Start .

Free Polling Reception Program

1. Press the programmed Quick Dial Key.

P ROGRAMMED

The program begins at once, or at the later time specified by the program.

Cross-reference:

Polling Reception: see page 158.

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Erasing a Program

When you wish to delete a keystroke program, do the following.

1. Function

P ROGRAM

CHOOS E KEY

❐ If you press

→

Start , a

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

Program List will be printed.

2. Press the Quick Dial key that holds the

program that you wish to erase.

Example:

YES

P ROGRAM

0 8

TRANS MI T DAI LY REP ORT

CLR

CLR:

3. To delete the program: Clear Yes

P ROGRAM

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

4. Either:

❐ Erase another program: Go to step 2.

❐ Return to standby: Function

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Confidential Transmission

Overview

Use this feature if you do not want your message to be picked up casually by

anybody at the other end. The message will be stored in the memory at the other

end. It will not be printed until an ID known as the Confidential ID is entered.

Note: ❐ The machine at the other end must have memory space available and

it must have the Confidential Reception feature.

❐ This is a proprietary feature, and as such it only functions with ma -

chines produced by the same maker that have this feature.

❐ Before sending a confidential message, it is recommended that you

call the receiver and advise them that you are sending a fax message

in this manner.

There are two types of Confidential Transmission.

1. Normal Confidential Transmission

The other party can print the message by entering the ID that was previously

stored using the Confidential ID feature.

2. Confidential ID Override

If you wish to send a confidential message to a particular person at the other end,

you can specify the Confidential ID that person has to enter to see that message.

Anybody entering the machine’s Confidential ID will not be able to see the

message. Before you send the message, don’t forget to tell the intended receiver

what code must be entered to print the message.

Note: The receiving machine’s Confidential ID is not changed by this process.

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

If the intended receiver has a Personal Code with a Confidential ID stored with it,

you can override the receiving machine’s ID with that Confidential ID. Then:

❐ The receiver can print the message by inputting the Confidential ID that is

stored with that person’s Personal Code.

❐ The intended receiver will also be informed personally by a Confidential File

Report; this report will have the name of the receiver on it, if the name was

stored with the Personal Code.

Cross-references

Confidential ID: see page 127.

Confidential File Report: see page 186.

Confidential Reception: see page 126.

Personal Codes: see page 110.

TCR: see page 185.

Procedure

To set up a confidential transmission, do the following.

1. Place your document in the feeder.

2. Either:

❐

Function

❐

If you have programmed one of

the User Function Keys to

activate this feature, press that

key and go to step 3.

CONF . TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

3. Dial then press Yes .

CONF . TRANS .

START

ENTER NO. OR

DES T:

See page 51 for how to dial.

4. Either:

❐ Dial another number: Go to step 3.

❐ Do a Confidential ID Override (see below).

❐ Press Start .

Confidential ID Override Option

This procedure will override the Confidential ID stored in the other party’s

machine. The override is only effective for this one transmission.

If OP TI ONS

is displayed:

↓

CONF . I D

ENTER I D CODE

TO END

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

2. Enter the Confidential ID that you wish

to use for this message.

Example:

Yes

CONF . TRANS .

ENTER NO. OR

OP TI ONS

START

DES T:

3. Dial and press Start .

For how to use other options, see page 59 and the pages following.

Auto Document

Overview

If you often find that you have to send a particular page to people (for example, a

map, a standard attachment, or a set of instructions), store that page in the

memory as an Auto Document, using a Quick Dial Key.

Then, when you need to send that page to somebody, press the Quick Dial Key

that you stored it in, place any other pages that you wish to send into the feeder,

dial, and press Start. At the other end, the Auto Document will be printed first.

The Auto Document is transmitted as is; you cannot write anything on it like

you can with a cover sheet. If you wish the machine to place your name on

your transmitted documents, try using the Label Insertion feature (see page

120).

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Storing an Auto Document

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49).

2. Take the document that you want to be

an Auto Document and place it into the

feeder.

❐ If you only wish to scan a part of the

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

document, use the Specified Image Area

feature. See page 118 for details.

ENTER F AX NUMBER

3. Press the Quick Dial Key that you wish

to store the Auto Document in.

Example: 08

S TORE AS AUTO DOCUMENT

❐ Be sure that this Quick Dial Key is vacant.

YES

3. Yes

Labeling an Auto Document

If you store a label for your Auto Document, the label will appear on the display

when you use the document. Also, you can attach an adhesive label to the Quick

Dial Key if you wish.

1. Function

AUTO DOCUMENT

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

❐ If you press

→

Start , a Program

List will be printed.

TO CANCEL

2. Press the Quick Dial Key that holds the

Auto Document that you wish to label.

Example: 08 Yes

AUTO DOCUMENT

0 8

ENTER LABEL

ABC

YES

CLR

3. Input your label, using the Quick Dial

Keys.

AUTO DOCUMENT

0 8

OF F I CE LOCATI ON MAP

ABC

Inputting labels: see page 7.

4. Yes

AUTO DOCUMENT

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

5. Either:

❐ Label another: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Using an Auto Document

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49).

2. If you wish to attach a fax message to

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

your Auto Document, place the fax face

ENTER F AX NUMBER

down into the feeder.

3. Press the Quick Dial Key that contains

the Auto Document that you need.

Example: 08

S END AUTO DOCUMENT

YES

4. Yes

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

5. Dial the destination(s), then

press Start .

Printing the Contents of an Auto Document

If you need to remind yourself of what one of your stored Auto Documents looks

like, do the following procedure.

1. Function

AUTO DOCUMENT

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

2. Press the Quick Dial Key that holds the

Auto Document that you wish to see.

Example: 08 Yes

AUTO DOCUMENT

TO CANCEL

0 8

OF F I CE LOCATI ON MAP

START

P RES S

3. Start

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Erasing an Auto Document

If you wish to delete an Auto Document, do the following.

1. Function

AUTO DOCUMENT

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

2. Press the Quick Dial Key that contains

the Auto Document that you wish to

erase.

Example: 08

YES

AUTO DOCUMENT

0 8

OF F I CE LOCATI ON MAP

CLR

CLR:

3. To erase the Auto Document:

Clear Yes

AUTO DOCUMENT

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

4. Either:

❐ Erase another Auto Document: Go to

step 2.

❐ Return to standby mode: Function

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Restricting Access to the Machine

Overview

When your machine arrives from the factory and is installed for the first time,

anybody can use it. However, using a system of Personal Codes, the machine

can be set up to prevent unauthorized persons from using the machine. The

necessary procedures are given in the following sections.

❐ Programming the Personal Codes: see below.

❐ Switching on Restricted Access: see page 113.

Programming the Personal Codes

The main advantage of Personal Codes is that they allow you to track machine

usage and restrict access to the machine. If you do not wish to restrict access to

the machine, you can still use Personal Codes to personalize your fax messages,

by using the Label Insertion feature.

The Personal Code is a four digit code. It can have any value from 0001 to 9999.

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Each user can be given a Personal Code. While programming, you can store the

following items with each Personal Code:

❐ A name: This will be printed on reports, such as the TCR, to identify the users

of the machine. It is also used with the Label Insertion feature.

❐ A Confidential ID: This must be different for each Personal Code, and different

from your machine’s Confidential ID. If somebody sends you a confidential

message, they can override your machine’s Confidential ID with the

Confidential ID stored with your Personal Code, if you inform them of this ID. If

so, the machine will print a Confidential File Report that will inform you when

the message has arrived. Then, you must input this Confidential ID to print the

message.

You can only store Confidential IDs if you have an optional memory card or

hard disk.

Note: You cannot register more than 50 Personal Codes with Names and Confi -

dential IDs in this machine. This means that if you switch Restricted Ac -

cess on, only 50 people can use the machine.

Cross-references

Using Personal Codes: see pages 59, 105, 113, and 128.

Label Insertion: see page 120.

TCR: see page 185.

Confidential ID: see page 127.

Confidential File Report: see page 186.

Confidential Reception: see page 126.

Storing a Personal Code

1. Function

P ERS . CODE

ENTER I D CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

❐ At this time, you can print a Personal

Code List if you press

→

Start

2. Input a Personal Code that you want to

store in your machine for later use.

Example: 5

YES

P ERS . CODE

5 4 7 7

❐ If you input the wrong code,

press No

CLR

CLR:

P ERS . CODE

5 4 7 7

ENTER LABEL

3. Store the code: Yes

ABC

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

YES

CLR

4. Input a name for this Personal Code

using the Quick Dial keys.

Example: JOHNSON

P ERS . CODE

5 4 7 7

J OHNS ON

ABC

Inputting and editing labels: see

page 7.

❐ If you do not wish to store

a label: Yes . Go to step 6.

5. Store the name: Yes

P ERS . CODE

CONF . I D S ETTI NG

5 4 7 7 J OHNS ON

YES

TO END

6. Either:

❐ If you do not have an optional mem -

ory card or hard disk, go to

step 8.

❐ Input a Confidential ID for the per -

sonal code used by this user.

YES

CLR

P ERS . CODE

5 4 7 7 J OHNS ON

4 6 5 6

Example 4

If you do not wish to store an ID: No

Go to step 8.

7. Store the ID: Yes

P ERS . CODE

ENTER I D CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

8. Either:

❐ Enter another code: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function

Editing or Erasing a Personal Code

1. Function

P ERS . CODE

ENTER I D CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

2. Input the Personal Code that you wish to

edit.

Example: 5

YES

P ERS . CODE

❐ If you input the wrong code,

press No

5 4 7 7

J OHNS ON

CLR

CLR:

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

3. Either:

❐ Erase this Personal Code: Clear Yes

Go back to step 2.

❐ Edit the contents of this code: Yes .

Go to step 4.

YES

CLR

P ERS . CODE

5 4 7 7

J OHNS ON

ABC

4. Edit the name stored with this code.

When the name is correct,

press Yes .

YES

CLR

P ERS . CODE

5 4 7 7 J OHNS ON

4 6 5 6

Inputting and editing labels: see

page 7.

5. Either:

❐ If you do not have an optional mem -

ory card or hard disk, go to step 6.

❐ Edit the Confidential ID stored with

this code.

When the ID is correct, press Yes .

P ERS . CODE

ENTER I D CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

6. Either:

❐ Enter or edit another code: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function

Switching on Restricted Access

Restricted Access allows you to keep a closer track of machine usage, and deters

passers-by from casually using your machine.

If this feature is switched on, users have to enter their Personal Code before they

can use the machine. The Personal Code must have already been stored in the

machine.

However, the user can enter codes directly at the keypad. Therefore, if you are

serious about using this feature to stop casual users from operating the machine,

you must allocate relatively obscure codes to all authorized users, and try to avoid

obvious numbers such as 0001.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

To switch Restricted Access On or Off, do the following:

If you wish to switch Restricted Access on or off, do the following procedure. (See

page 10 if you need more information about the User Para meter settings

adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 04

are shown.

Digit 5

The setting that you need to change is

digit 5.

0: Restricted Access is Off

1: Restricted Access is On

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 5 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

Operating the Machine with Restricted Access Switched On

If you have switched Restricted Access on, the display is as shown below when

the machine is in standby mode.

Before you can use the machine, you must enter your personal code that you

have already registered in the machine. See page 110 for how to store Personal

Codes.

RES TRI CTED ACCES S

CODE

ENTER CODE

DEC. 4 . 1 1 : 5 0 AM

1. Enter your personal code.

Example:

2. After a second, the normal standby display will appear, and you can use the

machine. If NOT P ROGRAMMED appears, you entered a personal code that is

not stored in the machine.

If you decide that you do not wish to use the machine now, you should return the

machine to Restricted Access standby mode. To do this, either:

❐ Insert a page into the document feeder and remove it immediately.

❐ Press Function twice.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Tonal Signals

Some organizations offer you special services by telephone, which you can

access by transmitting Touch Tone or DTMF tones. If your phone service provides

only pulse dialing, or if you are calling over a digital network, the ability to

generate Tonal Signals will allow you to access these services.

First, dial the other party. When you are through to the other end, press the Tone

key and enter the code number that is needed to access the required feature at

the other terminal.

You do not need to press the Tone key if your machine is set up for dialing in Tone

Dial (DTMF) mode.

Before you can use this feature, you must program one of the User Function Keys

as the Tone key. See page 163 for how to do this. In the following procedure,

suppose that we have already programmed the F1 key as a Tone key.

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode, and that there is no

document in the feeder.

2. Pick up the telephone handset, or press On Hook Dial .

3. Dial the remote facility. Do not press Start .

4. After your line is connected to the remote facility, do the following:

❐ If your telephone line type is DTMF (Tone Dial): Go to step 5.

❐ If your telephone line type is Pulse Dial: Press F1 . A dot appears on the

display.

5. Input the digits that you need to use the remote facility. These digits will

depend on the remote facility.

Note: Do not press Start .

6. After you have finished your business with the remote facility, hang up.

Cross-reference

Tone Dial (Telephone Line Type): see page 28.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Chain Dialing

This feature allows you to compose a telephone number from various parts, some

of which may be stored as Quick Dial Keys or Speed Dial Codes, and some of

which may be input at the keypad.

For example, you can program commonly used area or country codes into Speed

Dial Codes or Quick Dial Keys.

This feature is convenient if:

❐ You often communicate with many terminals for which the area code, or

international code is the same.

❐ You often make international calls.

For example, if you often call Tokyo, Japan, program 011813 (Overseas to

Tokyo from the USA) as Quick Dial Key 01. This will save work at the operation

panel when dialing a Tokyo number.

❐ Your PBX requires an ID code before the destination number.

For example, if your ID is 1234567, and the destination is stored in Quick Dial

Key 01, enter 1234567 at the keypad, press Pause, then press Quick Dial Key

01.

Note: Do not store any labels with the Quick Dials and Speed Dials that you are

using with Chain Dialing. This is because Label Insertion does not work

with Chain Dialing.

Cross-reference

Quick Dial and Speed Dial: see page 29.

Label Insertion: see page 120.

Example: 01133-1-5553333 (From the USA to Paris).

Assume that the following Quick Dial and Speed Dial numbers have already been

programmed.

❐ Quick Dial 01 = 01133 (Overseas to France)

❐ Quick Dial 02 = 1 (Paris)

❐ Speed Dial 10 = 555

When the machine asks you to dial:

On Hook Dial or Handset Mode:

Press 01 02 Speed Dial

then

Other:

Press 01 Pause 02 Pause Speed Dial

Pause then

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Secure Transmission

Overview

This feature allows some degree of data security when sending a fax message.

However, care should be taken because the method used for data encryption is

quite simple, unlike the methods used in data scramblers or in the DES (Data

Encryption Standard) used in some software packages.

The transmitting machine will encrypt the data, and the receiving machine will

recover the original data form the encrypted signal before printing.

The ID code for Secure Transmission is fixed. When sending a fax message by

Secure Transmission, the supplier is not responsible for the interception or

decoding of the message by an unauthorized party.

Before using this feature, you must program one of the User Function Keys to

activate this feature (Function 35; see page 163).

Changing the Secure Transmission on/off Home Position Setting

To change the Secure Transmission on/off home position setting, do the following

procedure. (See page 10 if you need more information about the User Para meter

settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 03

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

digit 3.

Digit 3

0: The home position is "Off". If

you use Secure Transmission, it

will be automatically disabled after

the transmission.

1: The home position is "On". If

you use Secure Transmission, it

will stay enabled after the end of

the transmission (the light under

the User Function Key will stay on).

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 3 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Making a Secure Transmission

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49 for details), then

place your document in the feeder.

2. Press the User Function Key that you have programmed for Secure

Transmission (if the light under that key is off).

3. Dial in the normal manner.

See page 51 for how to dial.

4. Press Start . The fax message will be printed automatically at the other end.

Secure Transmission only works if the machine at the other end is equipped with

the same feature.

Specified Image Area

Overview

If you only wish to transmit a part of the page, use this feature. You tell the

machine what area to scan by specifying two parameters: The Skip Length, and

the Scan Length. See the following diagram.

Skip

Length

Scan

Length

This feature cannot be used when you are transmitting using an OMR sheet,

immediate transmission, when you are making a copy.

Before you can to use the feature during a transmission, you must:

❐ Set up the feature using Function 96 (see the next page).

❐ Program one of the User Function Keys so that you can activate this feature

during the transmission procedure.

Note: If skip length is longer than the paper, the machine stops scanning.

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Changing the Specified Image Area On/Off Home Position Setting

In a new machine, this setting is off. If you change this setting to "On", the image

area that you input (using Function 96; see below) will be used for all of your

transmitted pages, unless you switch off the light under the User Function Key

that you programmed for this feature.

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 03

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

digit 5.

Digit 5

0: The home position is "Off". After

transmission, Specified Image Area will

switch itself off.

1: The home position is "On". After

transmission, Specified Image Area will

stay active and the lamp under the

User Function Key will stay lit.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 4 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

Specifying an Image Area

YES

1. Function

I MAGE AREA

TO END

S KI P LENGTH:

S CAN LENGTH:

0 0 0

YES

I MAGE AREA

TO END

2. Input the skip length then press ↓ .

You must enter a three digit value.

For example, for 75 mm, input 075.

S KI P LENGTH:

0 7 5

0 0 0

S CAN LENGTH:

3. Input the scan length then press ↓ .

You must enter a three digit value.

For example, for 95 mm, input 095.

❐ 1 inch is 25.4 mm. You must input

the dimensions in mm.

4. Finish: Yes

The machine returns to the transmission procedure.

Specified Image Area is available only when you are doing one of the following:

❐ Memory Transmission (including Confidential Transmission and Transfer

Request)

❐ Storing a document for Polling Transmission

❐ Storing an Auto Document

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Label Insertion

This feature supplements the TTI. It uses the Personal Code and the Quick Dial

or Speed Dial Label to inform the other party who is sending the message, and to

state who the message is for.

To use this feature, you must:

❐ Switch Label Insertion on for each Quick Dial and Speed Dial that you wish to

use this feature with (see the procedures starting on pages 31 and 34).

❐ Program the Personal Codes of the machine’s users, and store their names

with their codes (see page 110).

❐ Program labels with the Speed Dial and Quick Dial numbers (see the

procedures starting on pages 31 and 34).

❐ When you make a transmission, use a Quick or Speed Dial, and select the

Personal Code option (see page 59).

Note: TTI on/off has no effect on this feature.

Example:

Your fax message as received at the other end

Date and Time

To: MR SMITH

TTI (32 characters)

From: JOHNSON

From the

Quick/Speed

Dial Label

From the

Personal

Code

In the above example, the message was sent using Johnson’s personal code.

The Quick Dial or Speed Dial used to dial the destination had MR SMITH as the

label.

Notes

If you later reprogram the Speed/Quick Dial, be sure to reprogram or delete

the label as well.

The top of the image will be overprinted if there is no margin at the top of the

transmitted page (this is also true for the TTI).

Cross-reference

Quick Dial and Speed Dial: see page 29.

Personal Codes: see pages 59 and 110.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Closed Network (Transmission)

This feature helps to stop you from accidentally sending a fax message to a

terminal that is outside your fax network.

The ID Codes of the communicating machines are checked. If they are not the

same, the communication is stopped.

This feature is similar to the ID Transmission option, but it cannot be switched

on/off for individual transmissions.

Contact a service technician if you are interested in this feature.

Note: This feature may not be reliable if you are communicating with a terminal

produced by a different manufacturer.

Cross-references

ID Codes: see page 85.

ID Transmission: see page 65.

Closed Network (Reception): see page 152.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Protection Against Wrong Connections

This feature prevents the automatic switching equipment in the telephone network

from accidentally connecting you to the wrong fax terminal.

However, it does not help you if you dialed the wrong number yourself. So, even if

this feature is switched on, you should still check your operation panel display to

check whether you have reached the correct terminal, and be ready to press Stop

if the wrong terminal’s RTI or CSI is displayed.

Your machine compares the number that you dialed with the CSI received from

the other end. (Only the last 8 digits are checked, and spaces and pauses in the

telephone number are ignored.) If the CSI is not the same as the telephone

number, the transmission is stopped.

This feature has to be switched on by a service technician.

Note: If you cannot send a message to a certain location using this feature, con -

tact the other end and make sure that they have stored their CSI correctly.

(If the other party is using a machine made by another maker, they may

not be familiar with the term CSI. Explain that you are interested in the

telephone number that they stored in the machine for identification pur -

poses.)

Cross-references

CSI: see pages 25 and 27.

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

ECM (Error Correction Mode) and Page Retransmission

ECM is a signaling system that greatly reduces the chance of data being lost

because of a bad telephone line. ECM is useful if you frequently communicate

over poor telephone lines.

With ECM switched on, the communication cost will increase if the line is bad, but

the data will be sent much more reliably.

If ECM is switched off, Page Retransmission will be used. The whole page will be

resent (unless you used Immediate Transmission, in which case damaged data

cannot be resent at all). ECM is more efficient, because it only resends the

damaged parts of the data, and the maximum possible number of retransmission

attempts is much higher, and it also works with Immediate Transmission.

If you wish reliable communication and do not mind paying extra communication

charges when the line is noisy, keep ECM switched on. However, if you are more

worried about communication costs, contact a service technician and ask to have

ECM switched off and Page Retransmission switched on.

❐ If Page Retransmission is on, pages can be sent up to 3 times before the

machine gives up. If you wish to change the number of retries, contact a

service technician.

ECM is switched on in your machine when it leaves the factory, to provide you

with the ability to send accurate and complete documents as reliably as possible.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TRANSMISSION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Batch Transmission

Overview

This feature will save communication costs if you often send more than one

message to the same location.

Example:

If various people in your office send messages to the Tokyo branch office, sending

all these messages on separate calls can be expensive. It is cheaper to send

them all together on the same call. You can further cut costs by sending out

batches during off-peak hours. To do so, simply create Keystroke Programs that

use Send Later or Economy Transmission to send to those common destinations.

Instruct people in your office to store all faxes for the Tokyo branch in the memory,

using Send Later or Economy Transmission. For Send Later, the selected time of

transmission must be the same for each message that you wish to include in the

batch. Then, when that time comes, the messages will all be sent out on the same

call, or ’batched’.

You must program a User Function Key to allow you to use Batch Transmission.

❐ If the light under that key is on, Batch Transmission is active.

❐ If the light is off, Batch Transmission is disabled. Press the User Function Key

to use Batch Transmission.

You can set up more than one batch. In the example shown in the diagram above,

you have set up two batches; one is for destination A and one is for destination B.

In another example, you could set up a batch for Tokyo at, say, 1 am, a batch for

Hong Kong at 2 am, a batch for London at 3 am, and so on.

Also, when you send a fax message, if there is a message in the memory waiting

for transmission to the same telephone number, it will be sent out with your

message. This will only happen if the message already in the memory is waiting

for retransmission (for example, because the line was busy on the first attempt).

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

TRANSMISSION

Note: You can have up to 50 fax messages in the same batch.

Messages using Confidential Transmission cannot be put into a batch.

Cross-reference

Send Later: see page 60.

Economy Transmission: see page 66.

Changing the Batch Transmission Home Position Setting On/Off

In a new machine, this setting is "On". If you wish to change this setting, use the

following procedure. (See page 10 if you need more information about the User

Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 03

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

digit 4.

Digit 4

0: The home position setting is "Off".

Batch Transmission will be disabled

after transmission. Use this if you only

wish certain transmissions to be

batched. However, you will have to

press the Batch Transmission User

Function Key for every transmission

you wish to be batched.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 4 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

1: The home position is "On". If you

use Batch Transmission, it will stay on

for all transmissions, until you turn off

the lamp under the User Function Key.

Well Log Transmission

Using this feature, you can transmit a document that is longer than the maximum

limit, without having to cut it up into separate sheets. However, you must contact a

service technician to have this feature switched on. The name of this feature is

taken from oil well borehole surveying. A well log is a vertical profile of a borehole,

drawn to scale, showing important data. A well log can be several yards long.

Caution

If this feature is switched on permanently, users must stay by the machine while their

documents are being scanned. This is because, if the document jams, the machine may take

much longer than usual to recognize the jam; this could result in excessive wear and tear of

the mechanical components of the scanner.

If a jam does occur, press the Stop key immediately.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Confidential Reception (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Overview

If the other party sent you a message using Confidential Transmission, the

message is stored in the memory, and not printed. The "Confidential File"

indicator on the operation panel lights up to inform you when a confidential

message has come in. Also, if you have switched Confidential File Report on, the

machine will print a report whenever a confidential message comes in.

There is no need to do anything immediately. When you want to print the

message, input the Confidential ID.

Notes: ❐ For this feature to work properly, you must have stored a Confidential

ID in advance.

❐ If the machine’s Confidential ID does not have any effect, contact the

sender and check whether they used Confidential ID Override to over -

ride your ID. Print the TCR to find out who the sender is, if necessary.

❐ If you have forgotten the machine’s Confidential ID, print a User Pa -

rameter List, or call a service technician for assistance.

Cross-references

Confidential ID: see page 127.

TCR: see page 185.

Confidential File Report: see page 186.

Confidential Transmission: see page 104.

Confidential ID Override: see page 104.

User Parameter List: see page 193.

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Storing a Confidential ID

This can be any four-digit code (using digits 0 to 9). It must be used to print any

confidential messages that your machine has received.

1. Function

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

CONF I DENTI AL I D

shown opposite.

❐ If no memory card or hard disk is installed,

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

you will not see this prompt.

2. Yes

CONF I DENTI AL I D

I D S ETTI NG

YES

TO END

3. Input the Confidential ID that you will be

using. Example:

CONF I DENTI AL I D

YES

CLR

6 7 5 4

4. Yes Function

If you do not store a Confidential ID, you will not be able to receive

confidential messages.

Printing a Confidential Fax Message

If the Confidential File indicator is lit, do the following to print the message.

1. Either:

❐

Function

If you programmed a User Function

Key to activate this feature, press

that key and go to step 2.

❐

P RT CONF . RX

CONF I DENTI AL I D:

ENTER CONF . I D

TO CANCEL

START

2. Input the ID. Example:

P RT CONF . RX

P RES S

CONF I DENTI AL I D:

. . . .

❐ If you cannot output a confidential file with

this ID, you have input the wrong ID or the

sender may have over-ridden your ID.

Contact the sender.

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

3. Start

NOTE: If the Confidential File indicator is blinking, an incoming fax message

has been stored in the memory using the Memory Lock feature.

To print the message, see page 130.

Confidential File Report

This report informs you when a confidential message has been received.

You can store a separate Confidential ID with each of the Personal Codes. If the

sender of the message uses Confidential ID Override, the sender can specify one

of these IDs. If so, the Confidential File Report will contain the name stored with

that Personal Code, drawing the attention of the intended receiver of the

confidential message.

You can switch this report on or off using Function 81. In a new machine, it is

switched on at the factory.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the list of features with

↑

and

↓

until CONF . F I LE

REP ORT appears.

3. Change the on/off setting by pressing

←

or → .

4. Finish: Yes Function

Cross-reference

Personal Codes: see page 110.

If you wish, you can prevent unidentified senders from sending you confidential messages.

See page 131.

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Memory Lock (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Overview

To use Memory Lock, you must first:

❐ Store a Memory Lock ID.

❐ Switch Memory Lock on.

If Memory Lock is switched on, the machine will not print any incoming fax

messages. They will be kept in memory until you enter the Memory Lock ID that

you previously stored in the machine. Messages received by Confidential

Reception will not be printed when you input the Memory Lock ID.

Cross-reference

Confidential Reception: see page 126.

Storing a Memory Lock ID

This can be any four-digit code (using digits 0 to 9 and letters A to F), except 0000

and FFFF.

1. Function

MEMORY LOCK I D

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

shown opposite.

❐ If no memory card or hard disk is installed,

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

you will not see this prompt.

2. Yes

MEMORY LOCK I D

I D S ETTI NG

YES

TO END

3. Input the Memory Lock ID that you will

be using. Example:

MEMORY LOCK I D

YES

CLR

6 7 5 4

❐ You must input this ID when you wish to print

an incoming message that was stored under

the protection of the Memory Lock feature.

4. Store the ID: Yes Function

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Switching Memory Lock On/Off

Before you can use Memory Lock, you have to switch it on using Function 81.

After you switch Memory Lock on, ( MEMORY LOCK) will appear on the display

when the machine is in standby mode.

Note: If you switch Memory Lock on, Forwarding will be automatically disabled.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the features with

↑

and

↓

until MEMORY LOCK appears.

3. Change the on/off setting by pressing

←

or → .

4. Finish: Yes Function

If you wish, you can prevent unidentified senders from sending you messages while Memory

Lock is on. See page 131.

Printing from Memory Lock (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

If the Confidential File indicator is blinking, a message has been stored using

Memory Lock. Print it using the following procedure.

1. Function

P RT MEM. LOCK

I D S ETTI NG

MEMORY LOCK I D:

TO CANCEL

2. Input the Memory Lock ID.

Example:

START

P RT MEM. LOCK

P RES S

MEMORY LOCK I D:

. . . .

3. Start

NOTE: If the Confidential File indicator is blinking, a message has been

stored using Memory Lock. However, if the Confidential File indicator

is lit, a message has been stored using Confidential Reception, and

the indicator no longer clearly shows the presence of files stored using

Memory Lock.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Rejection of Messages from Unidentified Senders

If you wish, you can make the machine reject incoming messages that require

storage to your machine’s memory, if they are not accompanied with an identifier

such as the RTI or CSI. Features that would be affected are Substitute Reception,

Memory Lock, and Confidential Reception, Forwarding, and Action as a Transfer

Station.

The procedure is as follows (see page 10 if you need more information about the

User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

❐ At this time, you can print a User

Parameter List if you press

→

Start .

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 05

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

that for digit 3.

Digit 3

0: Messages are not rejected.

1: Messages are rejected.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 3 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

Cross-references

Substitute Reception: see page 75.

Memory Lock: see page 129.

Confidential Reception: see page 126.

Forwarding: see page 134.

Action as a Transfer Station: see page 87.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Authorized Reception

Overview

This feature helps you to reject junk fax mail. It lets you specify which terminals

you wish to receive fax messages from; all others will be shut out.

To authorize reception from a particular sender:

❐ Program the RTI or CSI of the sender. (Ask the sending party what their

RTI/CSI is. Or make a communication with that terminal, print a TCR and read

off the RTI/CSI.)

If the other party is using a machine made by another maker, they may not be

familiar with the terms RTI or CSI. Explain that you are interested in the

telephone number that they stored in the machine for identification purposes.

❐ Switch Authorized Reception on.

If the RTI/CSI is not the same as any of those that you have programmed into this

feature, the message will not be accepted.

The number of RTI/CSI’s that you can store for use with this feature is limited to

50. However, you can use Wild Cards to extend the number of RTI/CSI’s that you

can specify.

Note: If one of the authorized terminals changes their RTI/CSI, you have to

change the stored RTI/CSI also. Otherwise, you will not be able to accept

messages from that sender any more.

Cross-references

RTI and CSI: see page 25.

TCR: see page 185.

Wild Cards: see page 144.

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Programming the Authorized Senders

1. Function

AUTHORI Z. RX S ELECT

DES T.

P RI NT LI S T

DES T. 6 on the opposite display shows that

there are 6 RTIs/CSIs programmed so far. In

a new machine, you will see DES T. 0 .

1 . RTI P ROG 2 . RTI

TO CANCEL

❐ At this time, you can print an Authorized

Reception List by pressing

→

Start .

2. Either:

❐ Store some RTIs/CSIs: 1 . Go to

AUTHORI Z. RX

ENTER RTI / CS I

step 3.

TO CANCEL

ABC

❐ View the RTIs/CSIs that you have

TO CANCEL

stored so far: 2 . Go to step 6.

AUTHORI Z. RX

CLR

DES T. 1 / 6

CLR:

DES T. 1 / 6 means that there are 6

RTIs/CSIs programmed so far, and the first

in the list is now displayed.

XYZ. CO.

❐ Finish: Yes

3. Type in an RTI or CSI, then

press Yes .

AUTHORI Z. RX

YES

S TORE AS WI LD CARD?

XYZ. CO.

Label input and editing: see page 7.

4. Either:

❐ Store this RTI as a wild card: Yes

❐ Otherwise: No

AUTHORI Z. RX

ENTER RTI / CS I

TO CANCEL

ABC

5. Either:

❐ Enter another RTI or CSI: Go to step 3.

❐ Finish: No . Go to step 2.

6. Scroll through the stored RTIs/CSIs on the screen with

↓ .

❐ It is not possible to edit an RTI/CSI; if you wish to do so, you must delete the incorrect

entry and re-input it.

❐ To delete the displayed RTI/CSI: Clear . Go to step 2.

❐ When you have finished: No . Go to step 2.

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Switching Authorized Reception On/Off

Before you use Authorized Reception, you have to switch it on using Function 81.

If it is switched off, the machine will accept any incoming fax message.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the list of features with

↑

and

↓

until AUTHORI ZED

RECEP TI ON appears.

3. Change the on/off setting by pressing

←

or → .

4. Finish: Yes Function

Forwarding (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Overview

Using this feature, you can send fax messages coming in from certain locations

on to another fax machine. The terminals that receive your forwarded messages

are called "forwarding terminals".

If other fax machines in your organization have this feature, you can use

Forwarding to set up distribution chains for incoming fax messages.

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

To set up Forwarding, program your machine as follows:

❐ Program the phone numbers of the forwarding terminals that you will use.

❐ Program the RTI or CSI of each sender, allocating it to one of the forwarding

terminals. (Ask the sending party what their RTI/CSI is. Or make a

communication with that terminal, print a TCR and read off the RTI/CSI.)

If the other party is using a machine made by another maker, they may not be

familiar with the terms RTI or CSI. Explain that you are interested in the

telephone number that they stored in the machine for identification purposes.

❐ Switch Forwarding on.

If the RTI/CSI of the machine sending you a fax is not the same as any of those

that you have programmed into this feature, the message will not be forwarded.

In this machine, you can specify up to 5 forwarding stations, and a total of up to

30 RTI/CSI’s. However, you can use Wild Cards to extend the number of

RTI/CSI’s that you can specify.

Notes:

Your machine prints all the messages that it forwards. If you do not want it to

do this, contact a service representative.

You can select whether or not your machine transmits a forwarding mark to

be printed at the other end on the top of each page of the output. This mark

brings to the other party’s attention that this message has been forwarded.

See page 140 for more about the Forwarding Mark.

If one of the senders changes their RTI/CSI, you must change the stored

RTI/CSI, or you will not be able to forward messages from that sender.

Cross-references

RTI and CSI: see page 25.

TCR: see page 185.

Wild Cards: see page 144.

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Programming the Forwarding Feature

This section shows you how to set up your machine to forward incoming fax

messages to another location or locations. After you have done this procedure,

you must switch Forwarding on for it to take effect (using Function 81); see page

140 for how to do this.

Read through these procedures before you use them, as they are a little

complicated.

1. Function

F ORWARDI NG

S ET F ORWARD. CODE

P RI NT LI S T

No .

❐ At this time, you can print a Forwarding

List by pressing

→

Start .

TO CANCEL

2. Input a two-digit code from 01 to 05 for a forwarding station number.

❐ The forwarding station is the number that you wish to direct incoming messages to.

YES OR NO

Example: 0

F ORWARDI NG

No . 0 2

DES T.

❐ DES T. 0 on the opposite display shows

that there are no RTIs/CSIs stored so far

for this forwarding station.

F ORWARDI NG

No . 0 2

ENTER F AX NUMBER

3. Yes

TO CANCEL

4. Input the telephone number of this forwarding station.

❐ If your machine is behind a PBX, add the access code before the number,

unless this forwarding station is an extension connected to the same PBX

as your machine.

Then press Yes .

F ORWARDI NG

No . 0 2 DES T.

S ELECT

See page 50 for how to dial.

Do not use the handset.

YES

1 . RTI P ROG 2 . RTI

TO END

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

5. Either:

❐ If you wish all incoming messages to be forwarded to this station:

Do not store any RTIs/CSIs for it.

Instead: Yes .

Then either go to step 2 to program another forwarding station,

or press Function to finish.

❐ If you only wish messages from certain senders to be forwarded to this

station:

Input their RTIs or CSIs (messages from senders other than these will not

be forwarded to this station):

Press 1 , then go to step 6.

F ORWARDI NG

ENTER RTI / CS I

TO CANCEL

ABC

❐ View the RTIs/CSIs that you have

stored so far:

. Go to step 9.

F ORWARDI NG

TO CANCEL

CLR:

CLR

No . 0 1

DES T. 1 / 6

DES T 1 / 6 means that there are 6

RTIs/CSIs stored so far, and the first in the

list is now displayed.

XYZ. CO.

❐ Finish storing RTIs/CSIs for this forwarding station and input another

forwarding station number: Yes . Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function

6. Type in an RTI or CSI, then

press Yes .

F ORWARDI NG

YES

S TORE AS WI LD CARD?

XYZ. CO.

❐ You can input up to 30 RTIs/CSIs for

each forwarding station.

7. Either:

❐ Store this RTI as a wild card: Yes

❐ Otherwise: No

F ORWARDI NG

ENTER RTI / CS I

TO CANCEL

ABC

8. Either:

❐ Enter another RTI or CSI: Go to step 6.

❐ Finish: No . Go to step 5.

9. Scroll through the stored RTIs/CSIs on the screen with

❐ To delete the displayed RTI/CSI: Clear

↓

❐ When you have finished: No . Go to step 5.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Editing the Forwarding Feature

1. Function

F ORWARDI NG

S ET F ORWARD. CODE

P RI NT LI S T

No .

TO CANCEL

2. Input the code number of the forwarding

station that you wish to edit.

Then press Yes .

YES

CLR

❐ See the Forwarding List for a list of

these codes.

F ORWARDI NG

No . 0 1

2 1 2 5 5 5 3 4 5 6

3. Either:

❐ Erase this forwarding station num -

ber and all RTIs/CSIs stored with it:

Press No x 2, then Yes to erase.

Go to step 2.

❐ Edit this forwarding station’s tele -

phone number.

If it is correct: Yes

F ORWARDI NG

No . 0 1 DES T.

S ELECT

DES T. 6 on the opposite display shows

that there are 6 RTIs/CSIs programmed so

far for this forwarding station.

YES

1 . RTI P ROG 2 . RTI

TO END

4. Either:

❐ To add RTIs/CSIs to this number:

F ORWARDI NG

YES

Go to step 6.

S TORE AS WI LD CARD?

XYZ. CO.

❐ To view or delete RTIs/CSIs allo -

cated to this number: 2 .

Go to step 5.

F ORWARDI NG

TO CANCEL

CLR:

CLR

No . 0 1

DES T. 1 / 6

XYZ. CO.

DES T. 1 / 6 means that there are 6 RTIs/CSIs

programmed so far for this forwarding station,

and the first in the list is now displayed.

❐ If you wish to view another forward -

ing station number: Yes .

Go to step 2.

F ORWARDI NG

S ET F ORWARD. CODE

P RI NT LI S T

No .

TO CANCEL

❐ Finish: Function

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

5. ↓ until the RTI/CSI that you wish to

delete appears.

To delete the RTI/CSI: Clear , then go

to step 4.

F ORWARDI NG

No . 0 2 DES T.

S ELECT

YES

1 . RTI P ROG 2 . RTI

TO END

❐ It is not possible to edit an RTI/CSI; if you wish to do so, you must delete

the incorrect label and store a new one.

Caution: If you delete all the RTIs and CSIs for a forwarding station, you

must also delete the forwarding station (see step 3). If you do not

do this, all incoming messages will be forwarded to that station.

6. Type in an RTI or CSI, then

F ORWARDI NG

press Yes .

YES

S TORE AS WI LD CARD?

XYZ. CO.

Inputting labels: see page 7.

7. Either:

❐ Store this RTI as a wild card: Yes

❐ Otherwise: No

8. Either

❐ Input another RTI/CSI for this forwarding station: go to step 6.

❐ Finish working on this forwarding station: No . Go to step 4.

❐ Finish: Function

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Switching Forwarding On/Off

Before you use Forwarding, you have to switch it on using Function 81. If it is

switched off, the machine will not forward any incoming fax messages.

After you switch Forwarding on, ( F ORWARDI NG) is displayed on the operation

panel when the machine is in standby mode.

You can also program a User Function Key to switch Forwarding on/off (use

Function 35, see page 163). If you have done that, just press that key whe never

you wish to switch Forwarding on or off.

Note: Forwarding cannot be switched on if Memory Lock is switched on. If you

wish to use Forwarding, you must switch Memory Lock off.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the list of features with

pears.

↑

and

↓

until F ORWARDI NG ap-

3. Change the on/off setting by pressing

←

or → .

4. Finish: Yes Function

Enabling and Disabling the Forwarding Mark

The forwarding mark is printed at the receiving end on the top of each page of the

fax messages that are forwarded from your machine. This mark will help the

operator at the other end to recognize messages that have been forwarded. If you

wish, you can switch this mark off.

To switch the Forwarding Mark on or off, do the following procedure. (See page

10 if you need more information about the User Para meter settings adjustment

procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 01

are shown.

Digit 0

0: Forwarding Mark is Off

1: Forwarding Mark is On

The setting that you need to change is

digit 0.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 0 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

Specified Cassette Selection (Optional Paper Feed Unit Required)

Overview

This feature is only available if your machine has more than one cassette. Using

this feature, you can direct fax messages from certain senders to be printed from

a cassette of your choice.

Example:

Put yellow paper in one cassette. Then, messages from head office can be

printed out on yellow paper; this will make it easy for you to see when a message

from head office has arrived.

To direct messages from a particular sender to a special cassette:

❐ Program the RTI or CSI of the sender. (Ask the sending party what their

RTI/CSI is. Or make a communication with that terminal, print a TCR, and read

off the RTI/CSI.)

If the other party is using a machine made by another maker, they may not be

familiar with the terms RTI or CSI. Explain that you are interested in the

telephone number that they stored in the machine for identification purposes.

❐ Switch Specified Cassette Selection on.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

If the RTI/CSI is not the same as any of those that you have programmed into this

feature, the incoming message will be printed on paper from the normally-used

cassette.

The number of RTI/CSI’s that you can store for use with this feature is 10. You

can use Wild Cards to extend the number of RTI/CSI’s that you can specify.

Note: If one of the senders changes their RTI/CSI, you have to change the

stored RTI/CSI also. Otherwise, messages from that sender will no longer

be sent to the required cassette.

Cross-references

RTI and CSI: see page 25.

TCR: see page 185.

Wild Cards: see page 144.

Programming the Specified Cassette Selection Feature

1. Function

CS T S ELECT

DES T.

1 . RTI P ROG 2 . RTI

S ELECT

P RI NT LI S T

DES T. 6 on the opposite display shows that

there are 6 RTIs/CSIs programmed so far. In

a new machine, you will see DES T. 0 .

TO CANCEL

❐ At this time, you can print a Specified

Cassette Selection List by pressing

→

Start .

2. Either:

❐ Store some RTIs/CSIs: 1 .

CS T S ELECT

ENTER RTI / CS I

Go to step 3.

TO CANCEL

ABC

❐ View the RTIs/CSIs that you have

stored so far: 2 . Go to step 6.

CS T S ELECT

TO CANCEL

CLR

DES T. 1 / 6

CLR:

DES T. 1 / 6 means that there are 6

RTIs/CSIs programmed so far, and the first

in the list is now displayed.

XYZ. CO.

3. Type in an RTI or CSI, then

press Yes .

CS T S ELECT

YES

S TORE AS WI LD CARD?

XYZ. CO.

Label input and editing: see page 7.

4. Either:

❐ Store this RTI as a wild card: Yes

❐ Otherwise: No

CS T S ELECT

ENTER RTI / CS I

TO CANCEL

ABC

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

5. Either:

❐ Enter another RTI or CSI: Go to step 3.

❐ Finish: No . Go to step 2.

6. Scroll through the stored RTIs/CSIs on the screen with

↓

❐ It is not possible to edit previously stored RTIs/CSIs; if you wish to do so,

you must delete the incorrect label and store a new one.

❐ To delete the displayed RTI/CSI: Clear

❐ When you have finished: No . Go to step 2.

NOTE: Messages from senders that have RTI/CSIs that match those that

were input using the above procedure will be printed using the first

(upper) paper cassette.

If there is no paper in the upper cassette, messages from the specified

senders will be stored in the memory (substitute reception).

If there is no paper in the lower cassette, messages from other

senders will be stored in the memory.

Switching Specified Cassette Selection On/Off

Before you use this feature, you have to switch it on using Function 81.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the list of features with

↑

and

↓

until S P ECI F I ED CAS -

S ETTE S ELECTI ON appears.

3. Change the on/off setting by pressing

←

or → .

4. Finish: Yes Function

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Wild Cards

This feature greatly enhances the effectiveness of the following features:

❐ Authorized Reception

❐ Forwarding

❐ Specified Cassette Selection

In each of these features, you have to store the RTI or CSI of various terminals

that you normally receive fax messages from. Then, when your machine detects

an incoming call, it checks the RTI or CSI of the other terminal, and acts

accordingly.

When you program RTIs for these features, you can program wild cards to greatly

expand the number of terminals that you can receive from.

Example:

If you wish to accept messages from all 150 branches of XYZ Company (using

Authorized Reception), print them on yellow paper (using Specified Cassette

Selection), and forward them on to head office (using Forwarding), you don’t have

to store the RTI of each branch of XYZ Company. Program "XYZ" as a wild card

for each of these functions. If the RTIs of all XYZ branches contain an "XYZ"

somewhere in the RTI, messages coming in from them will be accepted, printed

on yellow paper, and sent on to head office.

CAUTION

This feature cannot recognize spaces.

Example:

If you store MAN as a wild card, and a terminal with an RTI that includes

MANCHESTER, HUMAN, or HUMANE calls you, your machine will recognize

MAN as a wild card and accept and/or forward the message.

Cross-references

Authorized Reception: see page 132.

Forwarding: see page 134.

Specified Cassette Selection: see page 141. RTI and CSI: see page 25.

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Reverse Order Printing (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

Normally, the machine prints the pages of received messages in the order that

they were received them.

However, with Reverse Order Printing, the machine will print the message from

the last page first. This will make it easier to distribute the received fax messages,

and more convenient for reading them.

Reverse Order Printing will not take place unless you switch it on beforehand.

To switch this feature on or off, do the following procedure. (See page 10 if you

need more information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 05

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

digit 1.

Digit 1

0: This feature is Off.

1: This feature is On.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 1 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Multi-sort Document Reception (Memory Card or Hard Disk

Required)

Using this feature, more than one copy of each incoming fax message can be

printed. This feature is useful if you need to reduce your photocopier’s work load.

❐ You will only be able to print one copy if the Two in One feature is enabled. See

page 151 for more about Two in One.

For example, if you switch this feature on overnight, you will not have to make

distribution copies of the messages that came in during the night. However, the

paper in the cassette will be used up much faster.

Cross-reference

Reverse Order Printing: see page 145.

Copying an Original: see page 181.

MULTI COP Y RX

ENTER # COP Y:

ENTER 1 - 9 COP Y

1. Function

COP Y( S )

YES

TO END

2. Input the number of copies that you need, then press Yes .

Copies of incoming faxes will be collated.

NOTE: Maximum number of copies: 9

To use Multi-sort Document Reception, you must switched Reverse

Order Printing on. see page 145 for how to do this.

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Center Mark

If you switch this feature on, a mark is printed halfway down each received page

on the left hand side. This makes it easy for you to position the hole puncher

correctly when you file away the received fax messages.

The center mark is not printed when you use the machine for making copies.

To switch this feature on, do the following. (See page 10 if you need more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 01

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

digit 1.

Digit 1

0: The center mark will not be printed

1: The center mark will be printed

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 1 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Checkered Mark

The machine prints a checkered mark in the top left corner of the first page of

received messages. Using this mark, you can find the first page easily. This

makes it easier for you to separate the messages that are lying in the copy tray.

To switch this feature on or off, do the following. (See page 10 if you need more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 01

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

digit 4.

Digit 4

0: The checkered mark will

not be printed.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 4 .

1: The checkered mark will be

printed.

5. Finish: Yes Function

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Reception Time

When you receive a message, the time is printed at the top of the page. However,

this is the time at the transmitting end. To check the local time, you have to print

the TCR.

However, if you switch on Reception Time, the local time is also printed on each

page that you receive. The time is taken from your machine’s internal clock, and

is the same as the time that will be printed on the TCR. Switch this feature on if

you often receive fax messages from other countries.

Cross-references

TCR: see page 185.

Date and Time: see page 24.

To switch this feature on, do the following. (See page 10 if you need more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 01

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

digit 2.

Digit 2

0: The reception time will not be

printed.

1: The reception time will be printed.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 2 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

Note: If the message is in the memory for a while (for example confidential re -

ception, memory lock or substitute reception), the printing time is printed

at the top of the page.

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Length Reduction

If the machine receives a page that is longer than the paper in the cassette, the

machine reduces the length of the received image so that it will fit on one page, if

the image length is within the following limits.

Paper size in the

cassette

Maximum reducible

incoming page length

Without Optional

400dpi Page Memory

With Optional 400dpi

Page Memory

14.4"

Letter (11")

Legal (14")

14.4"

15.1"

If the received image is longer than the above limits, there is no reduction and the

image is split up and printed on two sheets of paper. Normally, the last 0.4 inch of

the received image will be repeated at the beginning of the next page.

However, if you wish, the second page can continue from where the first page

ended.

Contact your service representative if you require any adjustments to this feature.

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

RECEPTION

Two in One

Printout

Received Message

Page 1

Page 2

Page 1

Half-letter size

Letter Size

This feature helps you conserve paper. If the size of the incoming page is half the

size of the paper in the cassette, the machine will print out two pages on one

sheet of paper.

In the example shown above, somebody is sending your machine two sheets of

half-letter sized paper and your machine is printing them out on one letter sized

sheet.

Note: ❐ The effectiveness of this feature depends on the sizes of paper

stocked in your machine’s cassettes.

❐ If your machine currently has two sizes of paper installed, the machine

will try to print the incoming message on the smaller size.

❐ If Two in One is switched on, you will not be able to print out more than

one copy of an incoming fax message using Multi-sort Document Re -

ception.

To switch this feature on, do the following. (See page 10 if you need more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 05

are shown.

The setting that you need to change is

digit 2.

Digit 2

0: Two in One is disabled.

1: Two in One is enabled.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 2 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECEPTION

ADVANCED FEATURES

Closed Network (Reception)

This feature may help you to prevent reception of excessive junk fax mail.

The ID Codes of the communicating machines are checked. If they are not the

same, the communication is stopped.

Note: This feature may not be reliable if you are communicating with a terminal

produced by a different manufacturer.

Cross-references

ID Codes: see page 85.

ID Transmission: see page 65.

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Polling

Overview

Polling means "picking up" a document that has been left for you at a remote fax

terminal. You can also leave a document in your machine’s memory for other

machines to poll from you.

Polled Terminal

Polling Terminal

❐ With polling, telephone line costs are charged to the person receiving the

message (the polling terminal).

❐ Polling can only be used when both machines have the Polling feature.

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Polling Transmission

Use Polling Transmission when you wish to leave a document in the memory for

others to pick up.

You cannot specify the telephone number of the polling terminal (the terminal that

you wish to poll your document), but using the ID Code there are ways to make

sure that the message does not go to the wrong place, as explained below.

There are three types of Polling Transmission.

Free Polling: Anybody can poll the message from the polled machine’s memory.

Secured Polling: The message will only be sent out if the ID Code of the polling

machine is the same as the ID Code stored in the polled machine.

Stored ID Override: There are two ways to use this feature:

❐ If your ID Code is different from that of the other terminal, you can use the

other terminal’s ID Code just for this transmission (ask the other terminal’s

operator what their ID Code is). Your machine’s stored ID Code will be ignored.

❐ For extra security, both parties can specify an ID Code just for this

communication. The ID Codes of both machines will be ignored. All

communicating parties need to coordinate their ID Codes in this case.

Only one document can be stored in the memory for Free Polling, and only one

can be stored for Secured Polling. However, with Stored ID Override, you can

store more than one file, but you must use a different ID for each file.

Secured Polling and Stored ID Override can only be used between terminals

produced by the same manufacturer.

Cross-reference

ID Code: see page 85.

Free Polling

1. Place your document in the feeder.

❐ If you only wish to scan a part of the document, use the Specified Image Area feature. See

page 118 for details.

2. Function

F REE P OLLI NG

OP TI ONS

See page 157 for the options that are

available with Polling Transmission.

START

P RES S

3. Start

❐ Your fax message is stored and held on polling standby.

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Note: If you see F I LE EXI S TS CLEAR? P RES S YES

NO , you already

have a message on Free Polling Standby.

❐ To keep the old message: No . Remove the document from the

feeder.

❐ To erase the old message: Yes

Secured Polling

1. Place your document in the feeder.

❐ If you only wish to scan a part of the

document, use the Specified Image Area

feature. See page 118 for details.

2. Either:

❐

Function

❐

If you have programmed one of

the User Function Keys to activate

this feature, press that key and go

to step 3.

P OLLI NG TRANS .

OP TI ONS

START

P RES S

NOTE

If you have not yet stored an ID Code using Function 61, you will be asked to

enter an ID Code. Proceed in the same way as for step 4 in "Stored ID

Override" on the next page.

See page 157 for the options that are

available with polling.

3. Start

❐ Your fax message is stored and held on polling standby.

Note: If you see S AME I D F I LE EXI S TS CLEAR? P RES S YES

already have a message on Secured Polling Standby.

❐ To erase the old message: Yes . The old message is erased and

your new one is stored.

NO , you

❐ To keep the old message: No . Input an ID Code in the same way as

for step 4 in "Stored ID Override" below.

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Stored ID Override

This procedure will override the ID Code stored in your machine. The override is

only effective for this one transmission.

1. Place your document in the feeder.

❐ If you only wish to scan a part of the document, use the Specified Image Area feature. See

page 118 for details.

2. Either:

❐

Function

❐

If you have programmed one of

the User Function Keys to activate

this feature, press that key and go

to step 3.

P OLLI NG TRANS .

OP TI ONS

START

P RES S

↓

I D CODE

ENTER I D CODE

TO END

4. Enter the ID code that you wish to use

for this message.

Example:

Yes

P OLLI NG TRANS .

OP TI ONS

START

P RES S

Note: If you see S AME I D F I LE EXI S TS CLEAR? P RES S YES

NO , you

already have a message on Secured Polling Standby.

❐ To erase the old message: Yes . The old message is erased and

your new one is stored.

❐ To keep the old message: No . Input another ID Code .

5. Start

❐ Your fax message is stored and held on polling standby.

NOTE: If you need to cancel a polling transmission operation, use Function 23

(see page 161).

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Options for Polling Transmission

When you store a document in memory for Polling Transmission, you also have

the following options:

❐ Auto Reduce On/Off: This is the same as for normal transmission (see page

63).

❐ TTI On/Off: This is the same as for normal transmission (see page 64).

❐ Polling Standby Duration: There are two options.

ONCE: The message will be automatically erased from memory after it has

been polled once.

KEEP : The message will be kept in memory until you erase it yourself using

Function 23; see page 161. While the message is in the memory, it can be

polled at any time by as many terminals that need it.

The options are only available if the following can be seen in the top right corner

of the display:

OP TI ONS

↓

YES

OP TI ON S ELECT

AUTO REDUCE

TO END

OF F

TTI

2. Scroll through the options using the

↑

and

↓

arrows of the scroll key.

The list of available options is as follows:

❐ Automatic Reduction

❐ TTI

❐ Polling Standby Duration (KEEP: The message is kept in memory until you erase it

yourself, ONCE: The message is erased from memory after it has been polled once)

If you wish to switch something on or off, use the

the scroll key until the displayed setting is correct.

←

and

→

arrows of

3. Yes when you have finished.

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Polling Reception

Use this feature when you wish to poll a message from another terminal.

You can poll documents from many terminals with only one operation (use Groups

and Keystroke Programs to make the most out of this feature).

You have three options: Free Polling, Secured Polling, and Stored ID Override, as

described for Polling Transmission (see page 154).

The maximum number of terminals that you can poll in one operation is 200.

Cross-references

ID Code: see page 85.

Groups: see page 30.

Keystroke Programs: see page 99.

Operating Procedure

1. Either:

❐

Function

If you have programmed one of

the User Function Keys to

activate this feature press that

key and go to step 2.

❐

P OLLI NG RECV.

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

2. Dial one or more numbers.

P OLLI NG RECV.

START

ENTER NO. OR

DES T:

3. Start

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Stored ID Override Option

This procedure overrides the ID Code that is stored in your machine. The override

is effective for this operation only.

If OP TI ONS

is displayed:

↓

I D CODE

ENTER I D CODE

TO END

2. Enter the password that you wish to use

for this operation.

Example:

Yes

P OLLI NG RECV.

ENTER NO. OR

OP TI ONS

START

DES T:

3. Dial and press Start .

For how to use other options, such as Send Later

for delayed polling, see page 59 and the pages following that.

NOTE: In theory, you can poll up to 200 different destinations using the above

procedure. However, this number depends on how many numbers are

currently waiting in memory to be dialed. See the table on page 43 for more

information concerning the limitations to this feature.

Continuous Polling Reception

If you wish to poll a number of destinations in a continuous cycle, switch this

feature on. After the machine has polled all the specified destinations, it will start

again from the first destination.

To switch on continuous polling reception, contact a service technician.

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

File Management

Every time you store a fax message in your machine’s memory, a new file is

created. Each file is given a number. To see which files are currently in the

memory, print a File List.

Note: A new file is created for each Polling Transmission, Substitute Reception,

and Confidential Reception also.

Cross-reference

File List: see page 191.

File Retention Time and File Retransmission

Normally, a fax message is erased from the machine’s memory after it has been

transmitted successfully. However, this machine has a setting known as the File

Retention Time, which allows you to keep transmitted fax messages in the

memory for a while longer.

You can select the File Retention Time, or switch File Retention off, using

Function 81.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the list of features with

↑

and

↓

until F I LE RETENTI ON

TI ME appears.

3. Change the setting by pressing

←

or → .

❐ You can select 24 hrs, 72 hrs, or Off.

4. Finish: Yes Function

File Retransmission

This feature allows you to transmit a fax message again, as long as the File

Retention Time has not yet expired. Use this feature when you wish to retransmit

a fax message that is still stored in a file in the memory. Note that you cannot

change, add, or delete any destinations, and you cannot alter the Send Later time.

1. Function

RETRANS MI T F I LE

F I LE NO. :

S CROLL

P RI NT LI S T

LAS T F I LE :

0 0 1 5

TO CANCEL

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

2. Either:

❐ Print a list of files:

→

Start

❐ Scroll through the files on the display: ↓ until the required file appears.

❐ If you know the file number, input it

directly: 0

RETRANS MI T F I LE

S CROLL

P RES S

YES

NO. 0 0 0 2

S TANDBY

XYZ COMP ANY NEW YORK

The second line of the display shows the current status of the file.

S TANDBY: The file is waiting to be transmitted.

I N US E: The file is currently being transmitted.

3. Yes

RETRANS MI T F I LE

NO. 0 0 0 2

YES

RES END F I LE?

4. Retransmit the displayed file

number: Yes

RETRANS MI T F I LE

NO. 0 0 0 2

READY TO TRANS MI T

The message will be retransmitted as soon as the machine is free.

Erasing a File from Memory

You can delete any of the memory files (except Confidential Reception files). This

is useful if the memory is getting full and you need to make some space for an

important job.

❐ You cannot erase files that were received using Confidential Reception.

1. ❐ Fax message file (Memory Transmission):

❐ Instruction file (Polling Reception):

❐ Fax message file (Polling Transmission):

(Example: Using Function 21)

Function

CLEAR TRANS . F I LE

S CROLL

F I LE NO.

P RI NT LI S T

LAS T F I LE :

0 0 1 5

TO CANCEL

2. Either:

❐ Print a list of files:

→

Start

❐ Scroll through the files on the display:

Then press Yes .

↓

until the required file appears.

❐ If you know the file number, input it

directly: 0

Yes

CLEAR TRANS . F I LE

NO. 0 0 0 2

YES

CLEAR F I LE?

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

3. Either:

❐ Erase the file: Yes

❐ Keep the file: No . Go to step 2.

Printing a File

If you need to see the contents of any of the files, use this feature.

❐ It does not work for Confidential Reception files.

1. ❐ Fax message file (Memory Transmission):

❐ Fax message file (Polling Transmission):

(Example: Using Function 51)

Function

P RI NT TRANS . F I LE

S CROLL

F I LE NO. :

P RI NT LI S T

LAS T F I LE :

0 0 1 5

TO CANCEL

2. Either:

❐ Print a list of files:

→

Start

❐ Scroll through the files on the display:

Then press Yes .

↓

until the required file appears.

❐ If you know the file number, input it

directly: 0

Yes

P RI NT TRANS . F I LE

NO. 0 0 0 2

TO CANCEL

START

P RES S

3. Start

Note: If you do not have the 40MB Hard Disk Option, files in memory are

erased when the power is turned off for more than an hour.

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

User Function Keys

There are five Function keys (F1 to F5) on the operation panel.

You can program each of these keys with a feature that you wish to use

frequently. There are two ways to do this.

❐ Store a User Function Code in the User Function Key.

❐ Store a Function Program in the User Function Key.

User Function Codes

You can program each of the User Function Keys with one of the following

functions. In a new machine, the User Function Keys F1 to F4 have already been

programmed, as shown in the table below in boldface.

Code

Function

Use the Direct Fax Number Entry

feature. [F1]

Code

Function

Print the TCR [F3]

Dial a group

Print a File List

Input a Personal Code [F4]

Use Economy Transmission [F2]

Switch TTI On or Off

Do a Confidential Transmission

Print a received confidential message*

Do a Transfer Request

Switch Memory Storage Report On/Off

Switch Forwarding On/Off *

Send Tonal Signals

Input a Subaddress (G4 mode only) **

Not used

Use Secure Transmission

Batch Transmission

Do a Polling Reception

Polling Transmission: Use Secured

Polling or Stored ID Override

Specified Image Area Setup

*: Memory Card or Hard Disk required

**: ISDN G4 Kit required

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

To store a User Function Code, do the following procedure.

1. Function

US ER F UNCTI ON

P RES S F 1 TO F 5

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

❐ At this time, you can print a User Function

List if you press

→

Start

2. Press one of the User Function Keys.

Example : Press F4 Yes .

US ER F UNCTI ON

ENTER CODE

CODE:

If this key is already used, the currently stored

code is displayed. Either:

TO CANCEL

❐ Press Yes to keep it as it is.

❐ Press No to erase the old code.

3. Enter the two-digit code for the function

that you wish to store.

YES

Example: Group Dial, press

2 .

US ER F UNCTI ON

CODE: 0 2

GROUP

US ER F UNCTI ON

P RES S F 1 TO F 5

P RI NT LI S T

4. Yes

TO CANCEL

5. Either:

❐ Program another key: Go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function

Function Programs

If the feature that you wish to store as a User Function Key does not have a User

Function Code, you can store it as a Function Program.

Example:

If you often use Function 32 (Programming Speed Dial), store it as a Function

Program in one of the User Function Keys. Then, when you want to store a Speed

Dial, just press that User Function Key instead of pressing Function, 3, 2, and Yes.

Storing a Function Program

For example, store Function 32 (Programming Speed Dial) into Function Key F4.

S P EED DI AL

ENTER S P EED CODE

P RI NT LI S T

1. Function

TO CANCEL

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

2. F4

❐ If you cannot select this Function Key,

it is already being used for something.

Select another Function Key.

P ROGRAM?

YES

3. Yes Function

Using a Function Program

1. F4

S P EED DI AL

ENTER S P EED CODE

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

2. Use the function as normal.

Deleting a Function Program

1. Function

US ER F UNCTI ON

P RES S F 1 TO F 5

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

2. Press the key that you wish to erase.

YES

US ER F UNCTI ON

Example: F4

CODE:

F UNCTI ON P ROGRAMMED

3. Yes No Function

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

OMR Sheets

Introduction

Instead of inputting instructions at the operation panel, you can mark up a special

form, called an OMR Sheet (OMR means Optical Mark Reader), and scan your

instructions into the machine. Your fax machine will read the marks on the form

and carry out your instructions. Your machine can accept five types of OMR

Sheets.

❐ User Parameter Program Sheet - use this to change the user parameter

settings

❐ Quick/Speed Dial Program Sheet - use this to store a number as a Quick Dial

or Speed Dial

❐ Group Program Sheet - use this to store numbers into a Group

❐ Transmission Program Sheet - use this to transmit a fax message

❐ Transfer Request Program Sheet - use this to make a Transfer Request

This section of the manual first describes the OMR Sheets and how to use them,

and finally gives the procedures that you need to use an OMR Sheet.

Using an OMR Sheet

The general procedure for using an OMR Sheet is as follows.

1. Print the OMR Sheet that you need, using Function 54 (see page 174).

2. Mark your instructions on the sheet. This will be explained in the following

pages.

3. Place the OMR Sheet into the feeder, then press Start then Yes .

When you are using an OMR Sheet to send a fax message or make a

transfer request, the OMR Sheet must be the first page that is scanned.

CAUTION:

❐ OMR Sheets should not be used more than 3 times. If they get dirty, incorrect

data may be scanned.

❐ Do not try to correct mistakes on an OMR sheet with an opaque white

correcting fluid.

❐ OMR Sheets must be marked with a felt tip or ball point pen as shown on page

167 and subsequent pages.

❐ Store OMR Sheets in a cool dry place in an airtight bag.

❐ Do not use cut off portions of OMR Sheets, photocopies of OMR Sheets, or

OMR Sheets with paper or adhesive tape attached to them.

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Completing an OMR Sheet

Each OMR Sheet contains a number of boxes or fields.

❐ Boxes are for marking user parameter settings, the contrast setting, and so on.

❐ Fields are for inputting telephone numbers and names.

Marking Up Boxes

The correct way to mark up a box is shown below. Make sure that you follow this

rule, or you may get some strange results when you scan the OMR Sheet.

Note: Use a black felt tip or ball point pen. Do not use a pencil.

If you need to mark up a consecutive row of boxes, observe the following rules.

❐ Each individual box must be completely filled.

❐ Do not leave a box only partly filled.

❐ Gaps between boxes must be kept clear.

See below for examples of correct and incorrect marking of a row of boxes.

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Marking Up Fields

There are two types of field.

❐ Number Fields: These are for inputting telephone numbers, personal codes,

the number of pages in the fax message (Page Count), and the transmission

start time (when using Send Later or TRD).

❐ Name Fields: These are for any names and labels that you need to input.

Number Fields

Each digit in a number field consists of a 3 x 3 rectangular array of dots. You can

only write down the characters shown in the following diagram.

Caution: You must write each character exactly as shown below, clearly,

carefully, and unambiguously. Otherwise, the machine may store

the wrong data or dial the wrong telephone number. The machine

cannot always detect errors in the data.

Note: ❐ If you wish to send Tonal Signals after a telephone number, use ’ •’ to

indicate the start of the tonal signal. See page 115 for more details on

Tonal Signals.

❐ If you wish to input a pause in the telephone number, use a ’ - ’ to indi -

cate a pause.

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Name Fields

In a name field, each letter, symbol, or punctuation mark is represented by two

digits. The characters that you can use with this machine are shown below, with

the character codes for each one.

Code

Character

Space

Code

Character

Code

Character

Code

Character

[

’

(

)

","

;

]

For example: SMITH

S = code 53, M = code 4D, I = code 49, T = code 54, and H = code 48

Note: The method of writing digits 0 to 9 and letters A to F is the same as ex -

plained above for Number Fields. However, if you wish to input a ’ * ’, ’ # ’,

’ •’, or ’ - ’ into a Name Field, do not use the method described in the ex -

planation of Number Fields on the previous page; input the two-digit code

from the above table.

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

The Five Types of OMR Sheets

This section describes each of the five types of OMR Sheet and how to mark

them. (Using Function 54, print a sample of each OMR Sheet for your reference

while you are studying this section.)

❐ Procedures for use are on page 174 and the pages following that.

User Parameter Program Sheet

You can use this sheet to change the settings of the User Parameters. Each

parameter is listed, along with each possible setting.

❐ An asterisk next to a setting indicates that this is the factory setting.

❐ To see the current settings, print the User Parameter List (Function 91, page

193).

To use the User Parameter Program Sheet, mark each setting that you wish to

make. For example, to switch Restricted Access on, first look for Restricted

Access on the sheet, then black out the box above " ON".

You might find this sheet more easy to understand than the eight-digit User

Parameter Switches described on page 10 and the pages following that.

Quick/ Speed Dial Program Sheet

You can use this sheet to program Quick Dial and Speed Dial numbers. However,

you can only program one telephone number with each OMR Sheet.

1. At the top of the sheet, mark up either QUICK or SPEED.

2. Mark up the Quick or Speed Dial number that you wish to store. You must

mark a Hundreds Digit, a Tens Digit, and a Units Digit.

Example: To program Speed Dial Code 25, mark up the first few lines of the

OMR Sheet as follows.

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

CAUTION: If you mark a Quick or Speed Dial that already contains a number,

the machine will replace the old number without giving you any warning.

3. In the "FAX No." field, write the telephone number that you wish to store in the

Quick/Speed Dial number that you just marked in steps 1 and 2.

❐ See "Number Fields" on page 168 for how to do this.

4. In the "FAX label" field, write the name that you wish to store with this

telephone number.

❐ See "Name Fields" on page 169 for how to do this.

5. For Label Insertion, mark either the ON or the OFF box.

Group Program Sheet

You can use this sheet to program Groups. You can program one Group with

each OMR Sheet. However, using this method, you can only store one full

telephone number in the Group; the others must all be Speed Dials or Quick

Dials. If you wish to store more full numbers in the Group, store them with

Function 33 (see page 38) after you have scanned the OMR Sheet.

1. At the top of the sheet, mark the Group number that you wish to program.

CAUTION: If you mark a Group number that already contains fax numbers,

the machine will replace the old numbers without giving you any warning.

2. In the "Group Label" field, write in a name for the Group.

❐ See "Name Fields" on page 169 for how to do this.

3. If you wish to include a full telephone number in the Group, write it in the "FAX

No." field.

❐ See "Number Fields" on page 168 for how to do this.

Continued on the next page.

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

4. Mark up the Quick and Speed Dials that you wish to place in this Group. Each

Quick and Speed Dial has one box above it.

Example: Store Quick Dials 01, 02, 06, 10, and 27, and Speed Dials 00, 01,

05, 16, 24, and 39 into the Group.

Transmission Program Sheet

You can use this sheet to send a fax message. Using this sheet, you can send

your fax message to more than one destination, and you can select a range of

transmission options. However, you can only dial one full telephone number; all

the others must be Quick Dials, Speed Dials, or Groups.

1. At the top of the sheet, next to Trans. Mode, mark up either the box above

"Memory" or the box above "Immediate".

2. Mark up the required contrast, resolution, and halftone type. Also, indicate

whether the marker should be ON or OFF, and whether your transmission is in

Group 3 or Group 4 mode.

3. If you wish to input one of the destinations as a full telephone number, write it

down in the "Address (Fax No.)" field.

❐ See "Number Fields" on page 168 for how to do this.

4. Mark each Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group that you wish to be the

destinations for this fax message.

For example, if you wish to use Quick Dial 01 as a destination, mark the box

above 01 in the "Address (Quick Dial)" area.

5. If you wish to use Send Later (shown as DIAL AT on the OMR sheet), TRD,

Personal Code, or Page Count, fill the appropriate fields.

❐ See "Number Fields" on page 168 for how to do this.

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

6. Mark either the ON or the OFF box for Voice Request, Economy

Transmission, Secure Transmission, Auto Reduction, TTI, and ID

Transmission.

Transfer Request Program Sheet

You can use this sheet when you make a Transfer Request.

1. At the top of the sheet, next to Trans. Mode, mark up either the box above

"Memory" or the box above "Immediate".

2. Mark up the required contrast, resolution, and halftone type. Also, indicate

whether the marker should be ON or OFF, and whether your transmission is in

Group 3 or Group 4 mode.

3. Input the number of the Transfer Broadcasting Station. To do this, either:

❐ Write the full telephone number of the Transfer Broadcasting Station in the

"Transfer Station (Full No.)" field. See "Number Fields" on page 168 for

how to write numbers on OMR Sheets.

❐ Mark one of the Quick Dials in the "Transfer Station (Quick Dial)" row of

boxes.

❐ Mark one of the Speed Dials in the "Transfer Station (Speed Dial)" row of

boxes.

NOTE: You can only enter one Transfer Broadcasting Station on the OMR

Sheet.

Refer to page 87 and the pages following for all conditions requi red to

perform a Transfer Request.

4. Mark the end receivers.

❐ You must mark the end receivers as Speed Dials, Quick Dials, and Groups

that are stored in the Transfer Broadcasting Station. Do not input any of

your own stored Quick Dials, Speed Dials, or Groups here.

❐ Confer with the operator of the Transfer Broadcasting Station if you need

their latest list of stored telephone numbers.

Example: If one of the end receivers is stored in the Transfer Broadcasting

Station as Speed Dial 10, mark the box above 10 in the "Receiver (Speed

Dials in Transfer Station)" area.

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Procedures

To Print an OMR Sheet

Note: You must have Letter, Legal, or A4-size paper in the cassette before you

print an OMR Sheet.

1. Function

OMR S HEET

CODE:

ENTER CODE

S CROLL

TO CANCEL

2. Select the OMR Sheet that you wish to

print.

❐ Use the

↓

key to scroll through the possi-

OMR S HEET

TO CANCEL

ble selections until the correct one is dis-

CODE:

US ER P ARAMETER

played on the screen.

START

P RES S

3. Start

Using an OMR Sheet to Send a Fax Message

After marking up the OMR Sheet, do the following:

1. Make sure that the machine is in standby mode (see page 49).

2. Place the OMR sheet face up at the top

MEMORY TRANS

OP TI ONS

of your fax message and put everything

ENTER F AX NUMBER

into the feeder face down.

Note: The OMR Sheet must be the

page that is scanned first.

3. Start

S CAN P ROGRAM S HEET

YES

4. Yes

The machine scans the OMR Sheet, then scans and sends the fax message

in accordance with the instructions on the OMR Sheet. Then, the machine

returns to standby mode.

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Using an OMR Sheet to Program the Machine

After marking up the OMR Sheet, do the following.

1. Place the OMR Sheet in the feeder face

MEMORY TRANS .

ENTER F AX NUMBER

OP TI ONS

down.

2. Start

3. Yes

S CAN P ROGRAM S HEET

YES

The machine scans the OMR Sheet and programs itself in accordance with

the instructions marked on the OMR Sheet. Then it returns to standby mode.

Errors

If the machine finds an error, it stops scanning the OMR Sheet and displays an

error message that shows you where the problem is. No data is stored and no fax

message is sent. Correct the error and scan the OMR Sheet again.

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Power Saver

Overview

Laser printing requires the application of heat to bond toner to the printer paper.

For incoming messages to be output quickly, a heating element inside the

machine must be kept hot. This may cause your electricity bills to rise.

The Power Saver feature lets you program timers to switch this heating element

on and off. This will help you to reduce overnight electricity costs. It also means

that anyone wandering through the office after working hours will not be able to

casually read your incoming fax messages, because incoming messages are not

printed while the heating element is switched off.

❐ If a fax message comes in while the heating element is switched off, the

message is stored in the memory. When the heating element switches back on,

the message is automatically printed.

❐ While the heating element is disabled, all incoming calls are refused when the

memory fills up.

❐ If you wish to print a fax message while the heating element is off, you can

temporarily override the timer and print the message. The timer will activate

again automatically a few minutes after you have printed your message.

As a typical example, you could program the heating element inside the printer to

stay off at night and over the weekend. (You can program different settings for

every day of the week.)

To use Power Saver, you must:

❐ Program the timers for each day of the week.

❐ Switch the Power Saver feature on.

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Programming Procedure

Example: For Tuesday, set the heater to switch on at 9 am and switch off at 6 pm.

1. Function

Yes

P OWER S AVER

( S UN) ON

DAY OF WK.

= 1 2 : 0 0 AM ON = 1 2 : 0 0 AM

YES

TO END

2. Use the

↑

and

↓

keys to scroll

through the days of the week.

Example: Press

Tuesday.

↓

twice to go to

P OWER S AVER

( TUE) ON

DAY OF WK.

= 1 2 : 0 0 AM ON = 1 2 : 0 0 AM

YES

TO END

3. Program the first timer for Tuesday:

❐ Both timers for each day have an ON/OFF setting. "ON" means that the heater will switch

on at the time indicated. "OFF means that the heater will switch off at the time indicated.

To change the ON to OFF, or the other way round, press

When the ON/OFF display is correct:

→

P OWER S AVER

DAY OF WK.

( TUE) ON

1 2 : 0 0 AM ON = 1 2 : 0 0 AM

YES

TO END

❐ Input the time: 0

Repeat step 3 for the second timer.

❐ Input 0 for the timer value .

To change AM to PM and the other

way around, press # .

P OWER S AVER

DAY OF WK.

( TUE) ON= 0 9 : 0 0 AM OF F = 0 6 : 0 0 P M

YES

TO END

KEEPING THE HEATER ON ALL DAY: Set both timers to ON = 12:00AM.

KEEPING THE HEATER OFF ALL DAY: Set both timers to OFF = 12:00AM.

4. Either:

❐ Program the timer for another day: Go back to step 2.

❐ Finish: Yes Function

NOTE: To print the received messages while the heater is off, press any key. After all the

messages have been printed, the heater will stay on for 5 minutes before switching off again.

Because of this, the Power Saver does not give you complete security for received

documents. For this type of security, use the Memory Lock feature; see page 129.

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Switching the Power Saver On or Off

The Power Saver feature must be switched on using Function 81. If it is switched

off, the heating elements will stay on all the time.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the list of features with

pears.

↑

and

↓

until P OWER S AVER ap-

3. Change the on/off setting by pressing

←

or → .

4. Finish: Yes Function

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Counters

These counters will help you if you wish to keep a regular check on how many

pages your machine has sent, received, and copied.

The machine has the following counters:

❐ Tx (Transmit) Counter: The number of pages that your machine has sent

❐ Rx (Receive) Counter: The number of pages that your machine has received

❐ Scan Counter: The number of pages that your machine has scanned (includes

copy mode)

❐ Print Counter: The number of pages that your machine has printed (includes

copy mode and report/list printing)

YES

COUNTERS

TO END

1. Function

TX: 0 0 3 2 5 6

RX: 0 0 2 6 4 8

S CN: 0 0 3 2 8 7

P RT: 0 0 2 7 0 3

2. When you have finished: Yes

Communication Result Display

You can call up an on-screen display of the results of the previous few

communications. This is useful if you wish to know whether your transmission was

successful, but do not wish to print a TCR.

Cross-reference

TCR: see page 185.

1. Function

→

P ERS . CODE 7 3 4 6

TO CANCEL

OCT. 1 0 0 8 : 2 3 AM RX OK 1 0 P AGES

2 1 2 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

2. Scroll through the past communications

on the screen using and ↓ .

↑

❐ To print the TCR: No Start .

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Entering PC Printer Mode (Printer Interface Required)

Using PC Printer Mode, you can connect your fax machine to an IBM or

compatible personal computer and use it as a printer. Documents printed from

your computer will be sent to your fax machine as text (ASCII characters) or

graphics (vector or dot image), depending on the application that you are using.

They will not be sent in the same way as fax messages, which are always dot

images.

You must obtain the optional Printer Interface Type 90 and the optional Paper

Feed Unit before you can use PC Printer Mode. Then, you must do the following

procedure if you wish to enter printer mode. For full details about the printer

interface kit, see the operation manual for the printer interface kit.

YES

S ET P RI NTER MODE

TO END

1. Function

READY: P 3 / P / S i

You can now operate the printer.

Selecting the Paper Feed Cassette for Printer Mode

(Printer Interface and Paper Feed Unit Required)

Use the following procedure to select which cassette the machine will use for

printouts from your computer.

1. Function

then press ↓ until the screen appears

as shown on the right.

CAS S ETTE F OR P RI NTER S ELECT

1 S T 2 ND 3 RD 4 TH 5 TH

TO END

YES

2. Use the ← and → arrows on the

scroll key to select the cassette that you

would like to use for printer outputs.

3. To store your setting: Yes

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

Copying

If you need to make a copy of something, and there is no copier available, use

your fax machine. Just place your original in the feeder, and press the Copy key.

Copying an original is a good way to test contrast and resolution before sending a document,

if you are not sure that the settings that you have chosen are appropriate. The copy made by

your printer shows you how the message would look when received at the other end. If it does

not look good, change the settings and try again.

Cross-references

Contrast, Resolution, and Halftone: see page 54.

1. Press Copy .

COP Y MODE

S ET DOCUMENT

P AP ER 8 . 5 x 1 1

NO. OF COP I ES :

8 . 5 x 1 4

Note: To cancel copy mode, press Copy again.

2. Use the

←

and → arrows on the scroll key to select the required copy

paper size. The number of choices that you have depends on how many pa -

per feed units you have installed.

Example: Press

→

COP Y MODE

S ET DOCUMENT

8 . 5 x 1 1

NO. OF COP I ES :

P AP ER

8 . 5 x 1 4

3. Place your original in the feeder.

COP Y MODE

P RES S

NO. OF COP I ES :

START

P AP ER

8 . 5 x 1 1

8 . 5 x 1 4

4. Input the number of copies that you need.

Example: 3 copies, press 3 .

COP Y MODE

P RES S

NO. OF COP I ES :

START

NOTE: Maximum number of copies: 99

P AP ER

8 . 5 x 1 1

8 . 5 x 1 4

5. Start

Note: ❐ If you make a single copy, the original will be reproduced at 400 x 400

dpi, even if the 400 dpi memory option has not been installed.

❐ If you wish to prevent the machine from being used as a copier, call

your service representative. If Copying has been disabled, you will see

COP Y MODE I S NOT AVAI LABLE if you press Copy.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Dual Access

Dual Access means that even if the machine is already carrying out a task, you

may be able to operate the machine.

For instance, if your machine is currently receiving a long fax message, but you

want to send a message and go back to your desk without having to wait by the

machine, you can place your message in the feeder, select the required

transmission features (such as Confidential Transmission), dial the number, and

press Start. Your message will be scanned and stored to memory while the

machine is still receiving. This means that you can take your fax back to your

desk before it is actually sent. However, to be sure whether your transmission

was successful or not, keep an eye open for Error Reports (or check the TCR).

The following table shows which features can operate simultaneously on your

machine.

Job that you wish to carry out at the same time

Job Currently in Progress

1. Storing to Memory

2. Printing from Memory

3. Copying

4. Printing an Automatic Report

5. Immediate Transmission

6. Memory Transmission

7. Receiving and Printing a Fax

8. Receiving a Fax to Memory

9. Printing a Fax Message or a

Report Manually

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✖

✔

✔: Possible, ✖: Impossible

Inch-to-millimeter Conversion

This machine is designed for use on digital data networks using Group 4. As a

result, the hardware of this machine is set up to scan on a dot-per-inch basis.

However, Group 3 fax machines are set up to scan and print on a

dot-per-millimeter basis. This means that, if a dot-per-inch based machine like this

one transmits to a dot-per-millimeter based machine, the data will be distorted

slightly as it is printed at the other end (the data is shortened by about 1% across

the page and expanded by about 1% down the page).

If you wish, you may ask a service technician to switch this conversion on or off.

If you switch it on, the machine will correct for the distortion.

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADVANCED FEATURES

OTHER

RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)

Overview

If your machine has a problem, a service technician can perform various

diagnostic tasks over the telephone line from the service station to try to find out

what is wrong with your machine. The service technician can also use RDS to

change some of your machine’s settings if you request it.

For RDS to work, you must switch it on before the service technician starts the

RDS operation on your machine.

For some RDS operations, it may be necessary to you to stay near the machine.

Switching RDS On/Off

Before your machine can accept incoming calls from an RDS, you have to switch

RDS on using Function 81. If it is switched off, the machine will not accept

treatment from an RDS.

1. Function

P S TN LI NE TYP E

S ELECT

YES

TO END

2. Scroll through the list of features with

3. Change the on/off setting by pressing

4. Finish: Yes Function

↑

and

↓

until RDS appears.

←

or → .

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OTHER

ADVANCED FEATURES

Short Preamble

Short Preamble slightly reduces communication costs between machines

produced by the same manufacturer. This feature reduces the length of signals

exchanged between the machines during communication.

If you are interested in this feature, contact a service technician to have it

switched on.

Note: Short Preamble may cause problems with long distance and international

calls. If you suspect that such problems are occurring, store the number

as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial. Then call a service technician and discuss

the matter. Tell the technician the Speed Dial/Quick Dial that you stored

the telephone number in.

Cross-references

Quick Dial and Speed Dial: see page 29.

AI Short Protocol

This feature employs Artificial Intelligence (AI) to learn the communication

characteristics of the machines programmed as Speed Dials or Quick Dials. AI

Short Protocol helps you to reduce communication costs between machines

produced by the same manufacturer. AI Short Protocol only works if you dial using

Quick Dial, Speed Dial, or AI Redial; also, the machine at the other end must have

the AI Short Protocol feature.

When you send a fax message, the two machines carry out a handshaking

procedure, during which they establish the best way to communicate with each

other. Using AI Short Protocol, this handshaking procedure only takes place in full

the first time you dial a particular number. Your machine remembers the optimum

communication parameters for calling that number. The next time you dial that

number, the machine will remember these parameters and the preliminary

handshaking will be significantly reduced, saving communication costs.

If you are interested in this feature, contact a service technician to have it

switched on.

Note: AI Short Protocol may cause problems with long distance and interna -

tional calls. If you suspect that such problems are occurring, store the

number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial. Then call a service technician and

discuss the matter. Tell the technician the Speed Dial/Quick Dial that you

stored the telephone number in.

Cross-references

Quick Dial and Speed Dial: see page 29.

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPORTS

AUTOMATICALLY PRINTED REPORTS

The following reports are automatically printed out at the appropriate time.

Descriptions of the Available Reports

TCR (Transmission Confirmation Report)

This report gives detail on each communication made by your terminal. It is

automatically output after a certain number of communications.

Transmission Result Report

This report is printed out after every transmission. It shows whether each

transmission was successful or not. If you have switched this report off, a

Communication Failure Report will be printed when a communication fails.

Error Report

This report is printed after each unsuccessful communication (compare with the

Communication Failure Report below, which is printed after an operation has

been completed). So while doing a broadcast, the machine may print a number of

error reports, and at the end, it prints a Communication Failure Report (or

Transmission Result Report if it is switched on).

Check the report and retransmit any pages that were not sent. Keep any error

reports that are printed, as they may be useful for a service technician if a

particular problem continues or gets worse.

Communication Failure Report

This report is printed after executing an operation, whether it be a single

transmission or a broadcast from memory, if a transmission failure occurred

during that operation. It is only printed if the Transmission Result Report is

switched off.

Memory Storage Report

If you switch this report on, it is printed immediately after you store a document in

memory for Memory Transmission or Polling Transmission. It gives the file

number, the time that it was stored, and the destinations (including any Group

numbers that were selected).

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUTOMATICALLY PRINTED REPORTS

REPORTS

Power Failure Report

This report is printed if the machine’s power was off for long enough to erase the

memory. The report gives details of the files that were lost. With this information,

you may store messages for transmission again, and contact the senders of any

received messages that were lost.

Transfer Result Report

After the end of a transfer request, the transfer broadcasting station sends you

this report. The report lists the telephone numbers of the broadcasting stations

and the end receivers, and indicates whether each transmission was successful

or not. With this information, you may retransmit any pages that were not sent,

either directly, or using another transfer request operation.

If your machine is the broadcasting terminal, it will print the report if it cannot send

the report to the transfer requesting terminal (for example, due to a busy line).

The report asks you to send the report manually, and gives the telephone number.

Polling Reserve Report

If you switch this report on, it is printed automatically after you program the

machine for polling reception (immediate or send later). It gives the file number,

time of polling, and destinations (including any Group numbers that you selected).

Polling Result Report

This report is printed after your machine polls a message from another machine.

Polling Clear Report

This report is printed after a polling file has been erased from memory.

Confidential File Report (Memory Card or Hard Disk Required)

This report informs you when a confidential message has been received.

If the sender of the message used Confidential ID Override, and specified an ID

that is the same as one of the Confidential IDs stored with a Personal Code in

your machine, the name stored with that Personal Code will be printed on the

Confidential File Report.

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPORTS

AUTOMATICALLY PRINTED REPORTS

Transmission Deadline Report/Polling Confirmation List

If you selected the TRD (Transmission Deadline) option, this report will be printed

when the deadline passes. The report will tell you whether the transmission was

completed before the deadline or not. If you selected TRD with Polling, the Polling

Confirmation List will be printed instead.

Switching Reports On/Off

Some of these reports can be switched on or off.

To switch a report on or off, do the following. (See page 10 if you need more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 02

are shown.

Each digit from 0 to 7 controls one of the

reports, except digit 1, as follows.

7 6 5 4 3 2

Digit

Purpose

Transmission result report (memory transmission)

0: Off 1: On Default Setting: On

Do not change this setting.

Memory storage report

Polling reserve report

0: Off 1: On Default Setting: Off

0: Off 1: On Default Setting: On

Polling result report (polling reception)

Transmission result report (immediate transmission)

0: Off 1: On Default Setting: On

Polling clear report

TCR

0: Off 1: On Default Setting: On

4. If you wish to change a setting, press the appropriate key on the keypad. For

example, to change digit 2, press 2 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUTOMATICALLY PRINTED REPORTS

REPORTS

Note: ❐ To switch the Confidential File Report on or off, use Function 81 (see

page 128).

❐ To switch the Error Report on or off, contact a service technician.

You may program one of the User Function Keys to

switch the Memory Storage Report on/off. Use

Function 35; see page 163 to see how to do this.

❐

Printing a Sample of Data on the Reports

For reference purposes, the machine prints the first few inches of the fax

message on the following reports.

❐ Transmission Result Report

❐ Memory Storage Report

❐ Polling Clear Report

❐ Communication Failure Report

❐ Transfer Result Report

❐ Transmission Deadline Report

❐ Polling Confirmation List

The procedure to switch this feature on or off is as follows. (See page 10 if you

need more information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 03

are shown.

The setting you need to use is digit 0.

Digit 0

0: This feature is Off.

1: This feature is On.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 0 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPORTS

AUTOMATICALLY PRINTED REPORTS

Report Formats

Example 1. Error Report

The following report means that the machine sent four pages but there were

errors during the first two pages.

Error Report (Apr 28 1992 12:09PM)

TTI XYZ COMPANY

Page Result

***

File Pers. Code Address

Mode

Time

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

0087 JOHNSON

XYZ CO. NEW YORK

G3TES

0’29" P. 4

Page not sent

P. 1

Personal Code

of the Sender

P. 2

Example 2. TCR

TCR (Apr 28 1992 11:40AM)

***

TTI XYZ COMPANY

<TX>

Date Time

Address

Mode Time Page Result Pers. Code File

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Apr 28 9:48AM XYZ NEW YORK G4TES 1’11" P. 5 OK

9:54AM XYZ LONDON G3TES 0’27" P. 1 OK

9:56AM 2125551234 G3TES 0’28" P. 1 OK

10:01AM XYZ BERLIN G3TES 0’24" P. 1 OK

YAMAMOTO

FENSTERWALD 0007

MCTAGGART

JONES

0005

0009

0010

<RX>

Date Time

Address

Mode Time Page Result Pers. Code File

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Apr 28 9:51AM DR J ALVAREZ G4RS 0’24" P. 1 OK

9:58AM 2015551234 G3RES 0"27" P. 1 OK

0006

0008

0011

10:56AM XYZ PARIS

G3RES 0’28" P. 1 OK

11:01AM M. JONES

G3RES 0"24" P. 1 OK

0012

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUTOMATICALLY PRINTED REPORTS

REPORTS

The following pages explain the symbols that appear in certain columns of the

reports.

The Mode Column

See the bottom of the TCR for a full listing of the symbols that are used on the

TCR. On other reports such as the File List, a code is given, informing the type of

communication. These codes are explained below.

SAF_TX

IMM_TX

CNF_TX

TONER

Memory Transmission

Immediate Transmission

Confidential Transmission

Transmission of Toner Order

Form

SUB_RX

FWD_TX

IMM_RX

LCK_RX

Substitute Reception

Forwarding

Normal Reception

Reception with Memory Lock

POL_TX

POL_RX

Polling Transmission

Polling Reception

TRN_TX

TRN_RX

Transfer Request

Reception of document from

Transfer Requester prior to

broadcasting

CNF_RX

AUTO_D

Confidential Reception

Auto Document

RPT_RX

Reception of Transfer Result

Report

Also, in the Address and Group Name column of the File List, for a Transfer

Request operation, you may see the following codes.

TRN_ST

REC_ST

Indicates that the number to the right is a transfer broadcasting station.

Indicates that the number to the right is an end receiver in the transfer

broadcasting operation.

TRN_1

TRN_2

TRN_RQ

Indicates that the number to the right is the first transfer station in a two-step

transfer operation.

Indicates that the number to the right is the second transfer station in a two-step

transfer operation.

Indicates that the number on the right is the station that requested the transfer

request for this file, using your machine as a transfer broadcasting terminal.

The Results Column

OK: Successful Communication

E: An error occurred

Standby: Ready to transmit

The Footnote on the TCR

TX counter: Total number of transmitted pages

RX counter: Total number of received pages

Counters listed on the User Parameter List

OPU counter:Total number of pages printed so far with the current

master unit.

SCN: Total number of pages scanned

PRN: Total number of pages printed

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPORTS

USER-INITIATED REPORTS

In the Result column, some reports may have an "E" followed by a code, and

there may be a message printed at the bottom of the report. This code and

message indicate that a problem occurred. The codes are explained below.

CODE

MESSAGE

EXPLANATION

HANG UP OR LINE FAIL

The other party either a) hung up, b) had no

message on polling standby, c) cannot do

confidential reception or transfer request, or d)

had an ID Code that did not match the one in

your machine. Alternatively, there could have

been a problem with the telephone line.

BUSY

NO ANSWER

NO FACSIMILE CONNECTION

The machine at the other end was busy.

The line is dead (no dial tone was detected).

The machine at the other end did not answer.

USER-INITIATED REPORTS

These reports can be printed at any time by executing a procedure on the

operation panel.

Descriptions of Available Reports

TCR

In addition to the automatic output of this report, you can print the TCR at any

time.

Press Function

If you have programmed User Function Keys to print the TCR or

the File List, just press that key then Start

Start

File List

This is a list of memory transmission, memory reception, and polling files still in

the memory. It gives information about each stored operation, such as the fax

numbers, start time, status, and type of operation.

Press Function

If you have programmed User Function Keys to print the TCR or

the File List, just press that key then Start

Start

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER-INITIATED REPORTS

REPORTS

Quick Dial List

This is a list of the telephone numbers and other items that you have stored in the

machine’s Quick Dial Keys.

Press Function

Start

Speed Dial List

This is a list of the telephone numbers that you have stored as Speed Dial Codes.

Press Function

Start

Group Dial List

This is a list of all the groups that you have programmed, and the telephone

numbers in these groups.

Press Function

Start

Program List

This gives details on the Keystroke Programs that you have stored in the machine.

Press Function

Start

User Function List

This shows how the User Function Keys are currently programmed.

Press Function

Start

Personal Code List

This is a list of the Personal Codes that you have stored, along with the names

and Confidential IDs.

Press Function

→

Start

Authorized Reception List

This is a list of all terminal names that you have specified for Authorized

Reception. It includes Wild Cards.

Press Function

→

Start

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPORTS

USER-INITIATED REPORTS

Forwarding List

This list shows details of how you have programmed the Forwarding feature. It

also includes the Wild Cards.

Press Function

→

Start

Specified Cassette Selection List

This is a list of all terminal names that you have specified for Specified Cassette

Selection. It includes Wild Cards.

Press Function

→

Start

User Parameter List

This shows the current settings of the User Parameters.

Press Function

→

Start

Cross-references

Immediate Transmission: see page 47.

Memory Transmission: see page 48.

Confidential Transmission: see page 104.

Confidential Reception: see page 126.

Keystroke Programs: see page 99.

Personal Codes: see page 110.

Quick Dial: see page 29.

Transfer Request: see page 87.

Polling: see page 153.

Groups: see page 30.

Speed Dial: see page 29.

TRD: see page 61

Authorized Reception: see page 132.

Forwarding: see page 134.

Specified Cassette Selection: see page 141. User Parameters: see page 10.

User Function List: see page 163.

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

REPLACING PAPER

❐ When the Add Paper indicator (

cassette is empty.

❐ When the Add Paper indicator (

) on the operation panel is lit, the upper

) on one of the lower cassettes is lit, that

cassette is empty (only when the lower cassette is installed).

To refill either cassette:

1. Slide the cassette all the way out, and

place it on a large flat surface.

CAUTION

To avoid dropping the cassette, hold it

by the front and side while pulling it

out.

If there is a paper feed problem in the

lower cassette entrance, please slide

out the cassettes one by one, from the

top cassette down, before removing

the paper.

2. Bend the new stack of paper a few

times.

3. Load the paper into the cassette.

NOTE: ❐ True up the edges of the

stack.

❐ Do not fill up the cassette

past the load limit marker.

Load Limit

4. Replace the cassette carefully.

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

REPLACING THE TONER CASSETTE

❐ When the Add Toner indicator (

) starts to blink, the toner cassette is

almost empty. You will be able to make 100 more copies before you have to

change the toner cassette.

❐ When the Add Toner indicator (

) remains lit, it is time to install a new

toner cassette.

Replacement Procedure

1. Take off the tray and document table.

Note: Do not switch off the machine.

2. Open the front cover. (Push up the

lever on the cover.)

3. Slide out the old toner cassette

holding the green tabs, and discard it

properly.

Note: Do not shake the cassette, or

toner may spill out.

WARNING

Do not incinerate waste toner. Toner

dust may cause flashback when

exposed to an open flame.

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPLACING THE TONER CASSETTE

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

4. On the new toner cassette, remove

the two green plastic stoppers.

5. Slide the new toner cassette into the

machine along the rails until it stops.

CAUTION

❐ Do not touch the cleaning blade

[A].

❐ Do not touch the gear [B].

[B]

6. Close the front cover.

[A]

7. Put the tray and document table back.

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

REPLACING THE TONER CASSETTE

Ordering Toner

When you run out of toner, you can dial your dealer, and input the amount of toner

needed. The machine will generate an order form and send it to your dealer.

To use this feature, you must do the following in advance:

❐ Switch this feature on (see below).

❐ Store the fax number of your dealer in Quick Dial Key 64. See page 31 for how

to store a number in a Quick Dial Key.

If you wish to use Quick Dial 64 for other purposes, you must switch Ordering

Toner off.

Switching the Ordering Toner Feature On/Off

To switch this feature on or off, do the following. (See page 10 for more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 04

are shown.

The setting you need to use is digit 7.

Digit 7

0: This feature is Disabled.

1: This feature is Enabled.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 7 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REPLACING THE TONER CASSETTE

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

Ordering Toner Procedure

You can automatically fax an order for new toner whenever you need to. Each

carton contains four toner cartridges.

When you need to order, do the following.

1. 64

ORDER NEW TONER

START

P RES S

AMOUNT

2. Input the number of toner cartridges that

you wish to order (the maximum order is

9).

Example:

ORDER NEW TONER

START

P RES S

AMOUNT

3. Start

❐ Your order is transmitted to your dealer. If the transmission was successful,

your machine prints out a report.

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

REPLACING THE STAMP

When the stamp made by the stamp becomes pale, replace the stamp as

described below.

1. Remove the document tray.

2. Open the scanner cover.

3. Replace the stamp.

If tweezers are not available, you

may press the point of a pencil down

vertically into the stamp and remove

it by lifting straight up.

4. Close the cover and put back the

document guide.

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE OF THE CASSETTE

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE OF THE CASSETTE

When you want to use a different size of paper in the cassette, do the following.

NOTE: You need a #2 Philips

screwdriver for this procedure.

Upper Cassette

1. Remove the upper cassette.

CAUTION:

To avoid dropping the cassette hold it

by the front and side while pulling it out.

2. Push the white lever [A] in the direction shown in the diagram below.

3. Change the position of the bracket [B] in accordance with the paper size

which you wish to install.

[B]

[A]

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE OF THE CASSETTE

4. Change the position of the two side fences [C] to match the new paper size.

5. Change the paper size actuator [D] to the appropriate one.

6. Push down the bottom plate [E].

7. Add paper and put back the cassette.

[C]

[D]

[C]

[E]

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE OF THE CASSETTE

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

Lower Cassette(s)

1. Remove the lower cassette.

CAUTION:

To avoid dropping the cassette, hold it

by the front and side while pulling it

out.

2. Remove the side fences [F].

3. Change the position of the bracket [G].

NOTE: If necessary, hold up the bottom plate [H].

4. Install the two side fences in the appropriate position.

5. Change the paper size actuator [I] to the appropriate one.

6. Add paper and put back the cassette.

[F]

[I]

[H]

[G]

[F]

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

To ensure that your fax continues to operate smoothly, some simple maintenance

is required. This entails cleaning a few components. User maintenance should be

done once every 6 months.

User Maintenance Table

The following table shows what items you need to look after from time to time.

Letters after component names in the Item column refer to the labels used in the

diagrams on the following pages.

Area

Scanner

Item

Separation

Roller [E]

What to Use

Soft damp

cloth

Possible Problems if Not Maintained

Document non-feed or multifeed

Pick-up Roller Soft damp

[J] cloth

Document non-feed or jam

Feed Roller [J] Soft damp

cloth

White Strip [F] Soft damp

cloth

Poor copy quality (dirty background on

copies and transmitted faxes)

R1 Roller [H]

Soft damp

cloth

Document skew, or dirt on the document

R2 Roller [H]

Soft damp

cloth

Exposure

Glass [I]

Soft damp

cloth

Vertical black lines on copies and

transmitted faxes

Main Body

Paper Feed

Rollers [N]

Registration

Rollers [L]

Corona Wire

[T]

Paper Feed

Rollers [U],

[W]

Soft damp

cloth

Soft damp

cloth

Corona wire

cleaner

Soft damp

cloth

Copy paper skew or jam

Copy paper skew or jam, or leading edge

of printouts missing

Vertical black lines on copies and received

faxes

Lower Paper

Feed Units (if

installed)

Copy paper non-feed or jam

Caution: A soft damp cloth is needed. The cloth must be wrung out tightly

before use. Use water only. Do not use a detergent or a solvent

such as alcohol.

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

User Maintenance Procedure

Scanner

[E]

➊

➌

➋

[I]

[F]

[J]

[H]

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

1. Prepare a soft damp cloth.

2. Turn off the main power switch.

Note for machines that do not have the optional hard disk unit

Before turning off the main switch, make sure that the remaining memory

capacity is 100%. If the machine is switched off for more than an hour, any

fax messages in the memory may be lost.

3. Remove the document table [A] and

copy tray [B].

[A]

[B]

4. Remove the document tray [C].

[C]

5. Open the ADF cover [D].

[D]

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

6. Clean the separation roller [E] with

the soft damp cloth, while rotating

[E]

the roller. This roller is near the

decal inside the machine.

➀

7. Clean the white strip [F] with the soft

damp cloth.

CAUTION:

Do not damage the sensor actuator

[G] (black plastic) below the white strip.

[F]

[G]

8. Clean the R1 and R2 rollers [H] with

the soft damp cloth. To rotate the

rollers, gently hold the cloth down on

the rollers and turn the main power

switch on. The rollers will rotate

once. These rollers are near the

decal inside the machine.

➂

[H]

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

9. Turn the main power switch off.

10. Clean the exposure glass [I] with the

soft damp cloth.

[I]

11. Clean the pick-up and feed rollers [J]

with the soft damp cloth, while

rotating the rollers in the direction

shown in the diagram. These rollers

are near the

machine.

decal inside the

➁

[J]

12. Close the ADF cover.

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

Main Body

[T]

[N]

[W]

[L]

[U]

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

1. Remove the upper cassette [K].

CAUTION:

To avoid dropping the cassette, hold

it by the front and side while pulling

it out.

[K]

[L]

2. Clean the three registration

rollers [L] with the soft damp

cloth, while rotating them in the

direction shown in the diagram.

CAUTION:

Do not damage the sensor

actuator [M] (black plastic).

[M]

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

3. Clean the white paper feed rollers [N]

in the cassette, while rotating them.

[N]

4. Put back the cassette.

5. Open the front cover [O].

[O]

6. Remove the toner cassette [P].

CAUTION:

To prevent your table from getting

dirty, lay a sheet of paper on it before

removing the toner cassette.

Do not touch parts [Q] and [R].

[Q]

[P]

[R]

210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

7. Lay a sheet of paper on top of the

master belt [S] (dark green plastic

belt), to avoid damage to the master

belt.

CAUTION:

Do not touch the master belt.

[S]

8. Slide the blue plastic corona wire

cleaner [T] from its home position all

the way across to the right side of the

machine. Then move it back to the

home position; you will hear a click

when the cleaner reaches home

position.

[T]

CAUTION:

Printout quality may deteriorate if the

cleaner is not at the home position.

9. Remove the sheet of paper from the

master belt, and put back the toner

cassette.

10. Close the front cover.

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USER MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

LOOKING AFTER THE MACHINE

Lower Paper Feed Unit(s) (If one or more are installed)

1. Remove the lower cassette.

CAUTION

To avoid dropping the cassette, hold it

by the front and side while pulling it

out.

2. Clean the paper feed roller [U] with

the soft damp cloth, while rotating it

in the direction shown in the diagram.

CAUTION

Do not damage the sensor actuator

[V] (black plastic).

[V]

[U]

3. Clean the paper feed rollers [W] in

the cassette with the soft damp cloth,

while rotating them as shown in the

diagram.

4. Put back the lower cassette.

5. Put back the document tray,

[W]

document table and copy tray.

6. Turn the main switch back on.

212

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Caution: Do not attempt to make any repairs other than those described in

this manual. Removing covers may expose you to dangerous

voltages and other risks. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.

CHECK THE INDICATORS AND DISPLAY PANEL

Check the indicators on the operation panel to check if there are any problems.

See page 19 for information about the indicators.

Also, if you see "PROBLEM ↓ " in the top right hand corner of the screen,

press ↓ to see what the problem is.

DOCUMENT JAMS

Clearing a Document Jam

If the Clear Original indicator (

) blinks:

❐ There is a document jammed in the feeder. Remove the jammed document

and repeat the transmission procedure.

❐ The document may be longer than the maximum limit (see Recommended

Types of Document, page 45).

1. Pull up the scanner release and open the scanner.

2. Carefully take out the jammed original. Do not leave any pieces inside. Then

close the scanner.

A defective or unrecommended document type may cause a jam. See pages 45

and 46.

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DOCUMENT JAMS

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Adjusting the Document Feeder

If you normally scan thin or thick sheets of paper you can adjust the auto

document feeder mechanism. Also, this is useful when you have document

multifeed or non-feed problems.

If you open the scanner cover you can find the adjustment knob (blue color) and

scale easily. Numbers 1 through 5 are printed beside the scale. Rotate the knob

until the arrow points to the number which you want to select.

1. Setting in accordance with the document type

Document type

Thin Document

Setting

Use 1 or 2

Use 4 or 5

Thick Document

2. Setting if problems happen frequently

Problem

Setting

Multifeed

Thin Document

Thick Document

Use 1 or 2

Use 4 or 5

Use 1 or 2

Non Feed

Document Jam

Note: In a new machine the setting is 3.

214

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

COPY JAMS

If the Clear Copy Indicator (

) blinks, there is a copy jam.

There are four possible locations:

❐ Cassette entrance

❐ Inside the machine

❐ Copy feed-out area

❐ Lower cassette entrance (for machines with one or more lower paper feed

units)

Cassette Entrance

1. Pull open the cassette.

2. Gently pull out the misfed paper.

Do not leave any pieces inside.

3. Replace the cassette.

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COPY JAMS

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Inside the Machine

1. Remove the trays, and pull open the

cassette.

2. Open the front cover.

3. Pull out the jammed paper carefully

by the leading or trailing edge, or by

the center if both edges are jammed.

CAUTIONS:

❐ Do not touch the fusing unit (the

parts inside the machine colored

orange). It may be hot.

❐ Do not touch the master belt.

❐ Any toner on the paper will not

be fixed to the paper. Be careful

not to get your hands or clothing dirty.

4. Close the front cover.

216

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

COPY JAMS

Copy Feed-out Area

1. Remove the document table and

copy tray, and pull open the cas-

sette.

2. Open the copy feed out cover.

3. Gently pull out the misfed paper.

Do not leave any pieces inside.

4. Close the copy feed out cover.

Put back the document table and

copy tray.

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Lower Cassette Entrance

CAUTION

If there is a paper feed problem in the lower cassette entrance, please slide

out the cassettes one by one, from the top cassette down, before removing

the paper.

1. Pull open the lower cassette.

2. Gently pull out the misfed paper.

Do not leave any pieces inside.

3. Replace the cassette.

COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS

If the Line Fail indicator (

) blinks:

Wait for the Communicating indicator to go out. Then press Stop .

❐ A poor line caused the communication to fail.

❐ The line is busy or noisy. Try to retransmit.

❐ The other machine is out of order.

❐ Ask the other party to check their machine.

218

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

OPERATING DIFFICULTIES

Problem

Required Action

STANDBY MODE

Nothing happens when the

switch is turned on.

Check the power cord. Is it properly plugged into the outlet?

Plug it in firmly

Switch the power on.

If the Power indicator does not light, check

that the power cord is plugged in.

Is the Clear Original or Clear Copy indicator on?

➣

SET DOCUMENT is not

displayed.

➣

The display does not show

the Ready condition, or the

machine stops during an

operation.

➣

Clear the misfed paper.

See pages 213 and 215.

Is the Load Paper indicator on?

➣

Load paper into the paper tray. See page 194.

Is the Close Cover indicator blinking?

➣

Close all covers indicated on the display.

Is the Add Toner indicator on?

➣

Load a new toner cartridge. See page 195.

Is the Call Service indicator on?

➣

Call your service representative, and

report the message on the display.

TRANSMISSION

The original is not pulled into

the auto document feeder.

You did not feed the document far enough into the feeder.

➣

Insert the document into the feeder until it stops.

Retransmit.

Do user maintenance, especially rollers [E] and [J] (see page

203).

➣

If the same problem still exists after user

maintenance, adjust the auto document feeder

mechanism (see page 214).

The machine cannot dial out.

The telephone line is disconnected.

➣

Check that the line is connected properly.

The telephone line type setting is incorrect.

➣

Check the telephone line type setting

(see page 28).

The machine cannot dial out

from behind a PBX.

The dialed number does not contain an access code or a

pause.

➣

Include the access number and a pause before

the telephone number.

The dialed number did not have enough pauses between the

access number and the telephone number.

➣

Try adding more pauses after the access code.

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATING DIFFICULTIES

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Required Action

Problem

Frequent original misfeeds

Multifeeds

Incorrect positioning of originals

Put the document in the feeder correctly.

See page 49.

Incorrect alignment of originals

➣

Align the edges of the document. See page 49.

Curled pages

➣

Flatten the document. See page 46.

Incorrect document type

➣

Use a proper document type. See page 46.

Mixed document types

➣

The pages must all be of the same type.

Static electricity on the originals

➣

Shuffle the document. See page 49.

User maintenance is needed

➣ Do user maintenance, especially roller [E].

See page 203.

The document feeder is not adjusted correctly.

➣

Adjust the auto document feeder.

See page 214.

Non-feeds

Copier silicone oil on the originals

➣

Wait a few minutes, then try again.

Incorrect alignment of originals

➣

Align the edges of the document. See page 49.

Curled pages

➣

Flatten the document. See page 46.

Incorrect document type

➣

Use a proper document type. See page 46.

More than 50 pages in the feeder

➣

Do not place more than 50 pages in the

automatic document feeder at once.

User maintenance is needed

Do user maintenance, especially rollers [E]

and [J]. See page 203.

The document feeder is not adjusted correctly.

➣

Adjust the auto document feeder.

See page 214.

220

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

OPERATING DIFFICULTIES

Problem

Required Action

The document is jammed in the feeder.

Remove the jammed document (see page 213)

and repeat the transmission procedure.

Transmission cannot take

place; the Clear

Original indicator blinks.

➣

The document may be longer than the maximum limit (see

page 45).

➣

Make sure that none of your originals exceed

this limit.

Do user maintenance, especially rollers [J] and [H] (see page

203).

➣

If the same problem still exists after user

maintenance, adjust the auto document

feeder mechanism (see page 214).

Transmission cannot take

place; the Line Fail indicator

blinks.

The other machine is out of order.

➣

Check the error report.

Ask the other party to check their machine

and correct the fault.

The line is busy or noisy.

Check that the dial tone is sent out.

Try to retransmit.

Note: Before taking action,

wait until the Communicating

indicator goes out, then press

the Stop key.

➣

Consistent difficulty in

communicating with a

particular terminal

There are some bad lines between you and that other

terminal.

➣

Store that terminal’s number as a Quick Dial

Key or Speed Dial Code.

Consistent poor image quality

when communicating with a

particular terminal

Then call a service technician. Inform the

nature of the problem and give the Quick Dial

Key or Speed Dial Code that you stored the

number in.

RECEPTION

The telephone keeps ringing

and no fax is printed.

You are in Manual Receive mode.

➣

Change to Auto Receive mode (see page 74).

Power is switched off.

➣

Switch the power on.

RECEPTION/COPYING

No printout; the Add Paper

indicator is lit.

The cassettes are empty.

➣

Add paper (see page 194).

No printout; the Clear

Copy indicator blinks.

The printer has jammed.

➣

Clear the jam (see page 215).

Do user maintenance, especially rollers [N], [L], and [U] (if the

lower cassette is installed). See page 203.

Copies appear dirty.

Copies are too light.

Copies are blank.

Does the original have a gray or colored background?

➣

Select the Lighten contrast setting.

Does the original have a low contrast image?

Select the Darken contrast setting.

The original must be placed face down in the document feeder

Position the original correctly. See page 49.

➣

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OPERATING DIFFICULTIES

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Problem

Required Action

Copy paper mIsfeeds occur

frequently.

Is the proper paper in the paper tray?

➣

Paper size and weight must be within the

standards set for this machine.

Is folded, wrinkled, damp, or curled paper in the paper tray?

Always use dry, undamaged paper.

Is the paper set properly in the paper tray?

Always load paper correctly. See page 194.

➣

Make sure that there is not too much paper in

the trays; do not fill them up over the load

limit mark.

Are there any pieces of misfed paper or other foreign objects

in the machine?

➣

Make sure that the paper path is

completely clear of paper and other

material after a misfeed.

Are you copying onto recycled paper?

Fan the stack of recycled paper and load

it in the paper tray.

The exposure glass is dirty.

➣

Stripes on copies.

➣

Clean the exposure glass (see page 207).

Do user maintenance, especially glass [I] and wire [T] (see

page 203).

TELEPHONING

You can’t receive phone calls;

the unit only rings once then

goes into receive mode.

You are in Auto Receive mode.

➣

Change to Manual Receive mode

(see page 74).

You can’t receive phone calls;

the unit does not ring.

The telephone line is not connected.

➣

Connect the modular cord (see page 22).

POLLING

Dialing took place, but polling

could not.

ID Codes do not match.

➣

Contact the person at the other end and make

sure that the ID Codes are the same before

trying the communication again.

222

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

DISPLAYED ERROR MESSAGES

The following messages may appear while you are operating or programming the

machine.

You cannot use the auto-dialer at the moment. Use the ten-key

pad or the handset.

CHECK AUTO- DI ALI NG

NO BOOKI NG F OR P OLLI NG

RECV

No polling reception operations have been programmed.

NO TRANS F I LES EXI S T

There are no messages in memory waiting for transmission.

NO P OLLI NG DOCUMENTS EXI S T

There are no messages in memory waiting to be polled.

THI S F I LE DOES NOT EXI S T

Incorrect file number. Check the file number and try again.

The memory cannot hold any more telephone numbers.

Either: Delete some numbers then try again.

Or: Wait until some of the Send Later or other delayed

TOO MANY DES T

transmissions waiting in memory have been carried out, then

try again.

DOCUMENT I N US E

This message is now being sent. You cannot print it now.

US ED AS GROUP

This Quick Dial Key has a Group stored in it.

US ED AS P ROGRAM

This Quick Dial Key has a Keystroke Program stored in it.

US ED AS QUI CK DI AL

This Quick Dial Key has a telephone number stored in it.

The telephone number was not stored, because either:

You cannot add any more numbers to this Group.

NOT ADDED

The digit, pause, or other symbol that you just attempted to

input was rejected because it is inappropriate.

The telephone number was not stored, because you cannot

store any more full telephone numbers at the moment.

Either: Delete some numbers from the machine to make room,

then try again.

NOT ADDED!

Or: Store this number as a Quick or Speed Dial before trying to

use it.

Or: Wait until some of the Send Later or other delayed

transmissions waiting in memory have been carried out, then

try again.

There is no room in the machine’s memory for any more

telephone numbers.

Either: Delete some numbers from the machine to make room,

then try again.

OVERF LOW

Or: Wait until some of the Send Later or other delayed

transmissions waiting in memory have been carried out, then

try again.

Either:

This Quick Dial Key or Speed Dial Code does not contain a

number.

NOT P ROGRAMMED

This Quick Dial Key does not contain a Keystroke Program.

F AX NO NOT P ROGRAMMED

There are no fax numbers stored in this Group.

The Group that you tried to erase does not contain any fax

numbers.

NO DATA P ROGRAMMED

Either:

ALREADY P ROGRAMMED

This number is already included in this Group.

This RTI/CSI has already been stored for use with this feature.

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DISPLAYED ERROR MESSAGES

SOLVING PROBLEMS

You cannot store any RTIs or CSIs for use with this feature; the

limit has already been reached.

No RTIs or CSIs have been stored for this feature.

You must add a pause after your area code when you input

your fax terminal’s own telephone number.

OVER NO OF P ROG RTI / CS I

RTI / CS I I S NOT P ROGRAMMED

NO P AUS E

You cannot switch Memory Lock off while there is a received

fax message in the memory. You must input the Memory Lock

ID and print the message first before switching Memory Lock

off.

S WI TCH OF F AF TER P RI NT OUT

NOT CHANGEABLE

( F ORWARDI NG)

You cannot change the setting of this feature.

If displayed under SET DOCUMENT in standby mode, this

indicates that Forwarding is now switched on.

If displayed under SET DOCUMENT in standby mode, this

indicates that Memory Lock is now switched on.

If displayed under SET DOCUMENT in standby mode, this

indicates that RDS is now switched on.

( MEMORY LOCK)

( RDS )

If displayed under SET DOCUMENT in standby mode, this

indicates that the Power Saver is now switched on.

The toner cartridge is empty. Install a new cartridge.

The indicated cassette is now empty.

The ID that you entered is not correct. Try again.

There was an error during a transmission or reception. Check

the error report.

( P OWER S AVER)

ADD TONER

ADD P AP ER I N CAS S ETTE NO. _

CHECK I D

COMMUNI CATI ON F AI L

CLEAR ORI GI NAL

CLEAR COP Y

A document is jammed in the feeder.

Paper is jammed in the printer.

CLOS E COVER

A cover is not closed properly. Check that all covers are closed.

You cannot print a report or make a copy while the machine is

sending or receiving a fax message.

This Quick Dial Key already contains a number. Try another

Quick Dial Key.

UNABLE TO P RI NT I N COMM.

UNABLE TO P ROGRAM

224

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

ERROR CODES

Fax machines use a telephone line. The same types of problems you experience

while making phone calls (such as noisy lines, crosstalk, disconnection during

conversation, weak signals) also occur with faxing. Telephone callers can deal

with the problems themselves (for example, by speaking a bit louder), but fax

machines cannot. Therefore some errors and line fails are to be expected.

When an error occurs, an error report is printed. This report includes an error

code. The following table lists common error codes and a few of the possible

causes. If any of these or any other error codes are persistent and the machine

does not work properly, contact a service technician.

Note: When an error occurs, it does not mean that you are doing anything

wrong or that your machine needs service. Only if the problem persists

should you call your service representative.

Code

0-01

Possible Cause

Printer empty or jammed at the other end

Faulty machine at the other end

Poor line condition

Incompatible or faulty terminal at the other end

Poor line condition

0-04

0-05

0-06

The facsimile machine that you were sending to disconnected during the call,

either due to noisy phone lines, a paper jam or because it ran out of paper.

Resend the page.

The machine at the other end received the page that you sent but it had errors on

the page. You may want to resend the page in question.

The other party’s memory could also be full. Contact the other party and ask them

to make room in their memory for your message.

Same as for code 0-06

0-07

0-08

0-14

0-15

The other party does not have the confidential or transfer function.

The other party’s memory may be full.

0-16

0-20

0-21

Same as for code 0-04

Poor line condition

Same as for code 0-04

You have just received a fax message, but there were problems because of poor

line condition. Ask the other party to resend.

Same as for code 0-22

0-22

0-23

The memory may be full, and there may be a problem with your printer, such as a

jam or running out of paper or toner. Wait for some space to appear in the memory,

then solve the problem with your printer.

0-24

If the memory was not full, substitute reception may have been disabled; switch

substitute reception on using digit 0 of user parameter switch 05.

There is a problem with the network or with the machine at the other end.

Document jam

0-70

1-00

Improperly inserted document

Document length exceeded the maximum limit

Same as for code 1-00

1-01

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ERROR CODES

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Code

Possible Cause

2-xx

Possible fault in your machine

The page took too long to send. Send again at a lower resolution, or without

halftone. The line may be bad.

4-00

There is a bad line. The telephone line at the rear of the machine may be

disconnected.

4-01

4-02

4-10

5-20

5-21

5-25

6-01

6-02

The received page was too long.

ID codes did not match. Co-ordinate ID codes with the other party.

Insufficient memory to receive the message. When the pages in memory have

been printed, ask the other party to resend.

Your machine has a problem.

Poor line condition or a problem with your machine

Poor line condition, a problem with the machine at the other end, or a problem with

your machine

6-05

6-06

6-08

6-09

6-10

9-07

9-08

9-09

9-17

9-20

9-22

9-23

9-24

9-50

9-51

9-52

9-53

9-54

9-55

9-56

9-57

A problem with the machine at the other end, or a problem with your machine

A problem with the machine at the other end

A problem with the machine at the other end, or a problem with your machine

Copy jam at the cassette entrance (first, or top, paper feed station)

Copy jam inside the machine (first, or top, paper feed station)

Copy jam at the feed-out area

There is a problem with your printer.

Copy jam at the cassette entrance (second paper feed station)

Copy jam inside the machine (second paper feed station)

Copy jam at the cassette entrance (third paper feed station)

Copy jam inside the machine (third paper feed station)

Copy jam at the cassette entrance (fourth paper feed station)

Copy jam inside the machine (fourth paper feed station)

Copy jam at the cassette entrance (fifth paper feed station)

Copy jam inside the machine (fifth paper feed station)

226

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SOLVING PROBLEMS

CALLING THE SERVICE STATION

The machine has a feature called Service Report Transmission. Use this feature

when your machine is having problems. The machine will transmit information

about the condition of your machine to your service representative. A technician

will then be able to find out what the problem is before making a visit.

To use this feature, you must do the following in advance:

❐ Switch this feature on (see below).

❐ Store the fax number of your service station in Quick Dial Key 63. See page 31

for how to store a number in a Quick Dial Key.

If you wish to use Quick Dial 63 for other purposes, you must switch Service

Report Transmission off.

Switching Service Report Transmission On/Off

To switch this feature on or off, do the following. (See page 10 if you need more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 04

are shown.

The setting you need to use is digit 6.

Digit 6

0: This feature is Disabled.

1: This feature is Enabled.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 6 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

SOLVING PROBLEMS

Sending a Service Report

When you need to send a service report, do the following.

1. 63

S ERVI CE REP ORT TX

START

P RES S

2. Start

If the transmission was not successful, the machine will not redial. You must

repeat the operation.

DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

If you often encounter problems when transmitting to a certain address, program

that address into a Quick Dial Key or Speed Dial Code.

Then contact a service technician, describe the problem, and tell them which

Speed Dial or Quick Dial you have stored the number in.

The technician can instruct the machine to use different transmission parameters

whenever you select that Speed Dial/Quick Dial.

If you reprogram the Speed/Quick Dial, be sure to inform your service technician.

Cross-references

Quick Dial and Speed Dial: see page 29.

228

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions:

20.3" x 18.7" x 12.1" (W x D x H)

Excluding trays, handset, cassettes, and optional kits.

Weight:

48.5 lbs

Excluding the master unit and printer paper.

Power Supply:

115 ± 20 Vac, 60 Hz; single phase

Maximum Power

Consumption:

Standby: 35 W

Transmission: 40 W

Reception: 180 W (excluding optional kits)

Copying: 310 W

Acceptable

Document

Dimensions:

Width: 5.8" to 12.0" (11.7" maximum scanning width)

Length: 4.1" to 47.2" (328’ max limit is available)

Thickness: 2 to 8 mils (20 lb bond paper)

ADF Capacity:

50 letter-size sheets (using 20 lb paper)

Cassette Capacity: Upper Cassette: 250 sheets

Lower Cassettes: 500 sheets per cassette

Maximum Total: 2250 sheets

Memory Capacity:

Base machine: 56 pages

With 1 Mbyte memory: 112 pages

With 2 Mbyte memory: 168 pages

With hard disk: 1,200 pages

Measured using a CCITT #1 chart (Slerexe letter) at

standard resolution

Resolution:

Standard:

Detail:

Fine:

200 x 100 dpi

200 x 200 dpi

200 x 400 dpi

Super Fine: 400 x 400 dpi (400 dpi option required)

Transmission

Speed:

6 seconds at 14,400 bps (G3 ECM) for a CCITT #1 test

document (Slerexe letter) using standard resolution

Compatibility:

Paper Size:

G3 (G4 kit available)

Letter, Legal

Maximum Printout 8.3"

Width:

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX A. PAPER FEED UNIT

WARNING: Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than

that mentioned in this manual.

Operation

Up to four additional paper feed units can be installed. Each paper feed unit can

hold up to 500 sheets of paper, which means that you can add an extra 2,000

sheets of copy paper capacity to your fax machine.

If you have the same size of paper in more than one cassette, the paper in the

uppermost cassette will be used.

Maintenance

Replacing Paper: See the section entitled REPLACING PAPER on page 194.

Copy Jams

When a paper jam occurs in the machine, and you have one or more optional

paper feed units installed:

❐ If the jam is at the top cassette entrance, substitute reception will take place.

Remove the jammed paper (see the section entitled COPY JAMS on page

215).

❐ If the jam is at the entrance to one of the lower cassettes, printing will resume

from the top cassette, or from one of the lower cassettes that is not affected by

the jam. However, if there is no available cassette with the same paper size as

the one that was originally selected for printing, substitute reception will take

place.

230

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX B. FAX MEMORY TYPE 90 40 MB HD

WARNING: Do not attempt any maintenance or troubleshooting other than

that mentioned in this manual.

General

You can upgrade the memory capacity of the facsimile machine with this hard disk

unit.

Neither the standard memory nor the optional 1 Mbyte or 2 Mbyte memory card

can be used if you install the hard disk unit.

This manual contains information about using the hard disk.

CAUTION

Do not knock, shake, or move the hard disk unit while the hard disk is working.

Note: The hard disk read/write head automatically moves to the shipping posi -

tion in standby mode.

Operation

The operating procedures are the same as those already described in this manual.

The memory features of the hard disk are the same as the features of the

standard memory or the optional 1 Mbyte/2 Mbyte memory card, except for the

following items.

1. The data will remain on the hard disk even if you switch off the power to

the machine.

2. The hard disk can store up to 1,200 pages (based on the CCITT number 1

test chart). The memory capacity is 40 Mbytes.

Note: Do not knock, shake, or move the hard disk unit while the hard disk is

working.

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Introduction

The ISDN G4 Option Type 90 allows you to send and receive fax messages on

high-speed high-quality digital networks. It will allow you to connect the machine

to an ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) for either Group 4 or Group 3 fax

communication.

A few of the features described earlier in this manual cannot be used over an

ISDN. These are as follows.

❐ Manual reception

❐ Telephone line type (DTMF/Pulse dial) selection

❐ Manual dialing with the handset

❐ Voice Request

❐ On Hook Dial

❐ RTI, TTI, CSI (these identifiers can only be used with Group 3 communication.

In Group 4 mode, another identifier called the Terminal ID is used instead; this

is programmed by a service technician at installation. The Terminal ID is

explained on page 240)

However, Group 4 has the following major advantages over Group 3:

❐ If your organization sends large volumes of material by fax, using Group 4 will

greatly reduce your communication costs as a result of the high speed of data

transmission.

❐ Normal analog networks tend to be noisy, affecting the quality of received data.

However, communications over digital networks are of a high quality.

❐ The Group 4 interface will greatly enhance other features, especially

broadcasting, transfer request, and other networking features, allowing

complex distribution of documents with just a few keystrokes. The types of

network that you can set up are described in the Networking section of this

manual (see page 81).

Note: Your sales or service representative will be able to help program all the

necessary group and transfer station numbers in the various broadcasting

terminals throughout your proposed network. Please coordinate with your

sales representative to obtain correct programming at the time of installation.

Batch Transmission

The use of Batch Transmission is critical to making your Group 4 ISDN kit a

cost effective alternative to Group 3. Set up a batch for each of your major fax

message destinations. To do this, decide on separate times of execution for

each of your batch files. Then, if you wish to send a message to one of these

destinations, use Send Later to delay the transmission until the time that you

decided for that destination. See page 124 for a description of the Batch

Transmission feature.

232

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Setting up the Group 4 Interface

Before you start sending faxes using the Group 4 interface, there a few items that

you have to store in your machine. These are as follows.

❐ Subaddress Key

❐ Own ISDN G4 Number

❐ Own ISDN G3 Number

❐ Next Transfer Station

Subaddress Key

Group 4 fax machines may be connected to a multiplexer or similar device.

Inputting the subaddress of a destination fax machine will allow you to reach it

directly if it is connected behind a multiplexer or similar device. The subaddress

can be thought of as similar to the extension number of a telephone connected

behind a PBX.

You must program one of the User Function Keys (F1 to F5) to input a

subaddress (see page 163 for how to program a User Function Key). When yo u

need to input a subaddress (during dialing, or when inputting your own ISDN G3

or G4 number), press that User Function Key (a backslash will appear), then input

the subaddress.

Own ISDN-G4 Number

This is your machine’s own telephone number for Group 4 communications over

the ISDN.

1. Function

OWN I S DN- G4 NUMBER

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

shown opposite.

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

2. Yes

OWN I S DN- G4 NUMBER

YES

TO END

3. Input your ISDN number for Group 4 communications.

The format of the number must be as follows: International Dial Prefix,

Your Country Code, Your Area Code, then you must input a Pause, followed

by your telephone number. After that, if your ISDN G4 number contains a

subaddress, type a slash followed by the subaddress number.

Check the International Dialing Prefix and the Country Code with your local

telecommunications operator. The example shown below is for the USA; the

codes to add are 011 and 1.

❐ Use the Pause key to add a pause.

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

❐ To type the backslash, you must have programmed one of the User Func -

tion Keys to input a subaddress (see page 163 for how to program a User

Function Key). Press that User Function Key to input the slash, then input

the subaddress.

OWN I S DN- G4 NUMBER

YES

CLR

0 1 1 1 2 1 2 - 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 / 2 4 6 8

4. Yes Function

Own ISDN-G3 Number

You can also make Group 3 communications over the ISDN. This procedure is for

storing your machine’s own telephone number for Group 3 communications over

the ISDN.

1. Function

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

OWN I S DN- G3 NUMBER

shown opposite.

YES

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

OWN I S DN- G3 NUMBER

2. Yes

YES

TO END

3. Input your ISDN number for Group 3 communications.

The format of the number must be as follows: International Dial Prefix,

Your Country Code, Your Area Code, then you must input a Pause, followed

by your telephone number. After that, if your ISDN G3 number contains a

subaddress, type a slash followed by the subaddress number.

Check the International Dial Prefix and your Country Code with your local

telecommunications operator. The example shown below is for the USA; the

codes to add are 011 and 1.

❐ Use the Pause key to add a pause.

❐ To type the backslash, you must have programmed one of the User Func -

tion Keys to input a subaddress (see page 163 for how to program a User

Function Key). Press that User Function Key to input the slash, then input

the subaddress.

OWN I S DN- G3 NUMBER

YES

CLR

0 1 1 1 2 1 2 - 5 5 5 1 2 3 4 / 2 4 6 8

4. Yes Function

234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Next Transfer Station

The Next Transfer Station allows your fax machine to be a transfer station in a

two-step transfer operation using a digital network. An example is given in the

section entitled Networking (see page 81); refer to this for details of how to use

this feature.

Cross reference

Two-step Transfer: see page 91.

1. Function

1 then ↓ until the screen is as

NEXT TRANS F .

YES

shown opposite.

TO S ET

P REVI OUS

TO CANCEL

2. Yes

NEXT TRANS F .

ENTER F AX NUMBER

TO CANCEL

YES

CLR

3. Input the number of the Next Transfer

Station.

NEXT TRANS F .

2 0 1 - 5 5 5 3 4 5 6

4. Yes Function

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Operation

Dialing and Storing Telephone Numbers

Overview

After installing the ISDN G4 Option Type 90, you must be careful to select the

correct signaling type (Group 3 or Group 4) when dialing, or when storing a

telephone number as a Speed Dial or Quick Dial.

The G4/G3 Selector key on the operation panel allows you to select whether the

telephone number is to be dialed using Group 3 (G3) or Group 4 (G4). An

indicator above the key will light to show which has been selected.

To change the setting, press the key until the required indicator is lit. In most

cases, <G3> (Group 3) or <G4> (Group 4) will appear on the display as a

reference while you are entering a telephone number.

Caution: When you dial a number using a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, or using

AI Redial, check the two indicator lamps above the G4/G3 selector

key to make sure that the correct mode is selected. If it is not

correct, press the G4/G3 selector key until the correct indicator is lit.

Notes: ❐ Your machine is set up to send to Group 3 fax machines over the regu -

lar telephone network (the PSTN, the Public Switched Telephone Net -

work). If you wish to send to Group 3 machines over the ISDN, contact

your service representative.

❐ When dialing a fax machine or telephone over an ISDN, the destination

could have a subaddress number. This number can be thought of as

similar to an extension number on a PBX. If the destination telephone

or fax machine has a subaddress number, input this number when dial -

ing. You can get this number from your contact at that location.

To enter a subaddress, you must use a User Function Key.

See page 163 for how to program a User Function Key

using Function 35.

236

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Transmission Procedure

The following example shows how to dial (assuming that the ISDN G4 Option

Type 90 has been installed). The differences between this procedure and the

procedure for the base machine (refer to page 49) are as follows:

❐ You have to select G3 or G4 before you dial a number.

❐ You may have to input a subaddress for a G4 number if the destination has one.

MEMORY TRANS .

S ET DOCUMENT

AP R. 4 . 1 2 : 2 5 P M

MEMORY 1 0 0 %

1. Make sure that the machine is in

standby mode (see page 49).

2. Carefully place the document into the

auto document feeder.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

< G3 >

3. Change the line type (G3/G4) to the cor -

rect setting by pressing the G4/G3 Se -

lector key on the operation panel.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

ENTER F AX NUMBER

< G4 >

4. Dial.

MEMORY TRANS .

OP TI ONS

See page 51 for how to dial.

You may use Speed Dial, Quick Dial,

Group Dial, or the ten-key pad.

P RES S YES OR CLR

7 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

G3 numbers - If your machine is behind a PBX, include the PBX access code and a pause

before the number. For an international number, place a pause after the country code.

G4 numbers - If you wish to enter a subaddress, press the User Function Key that you have

already programmed as the subaddress key. Then enter the subaddress.

To enter a subaddress, you must use a User Function Key. See page 163 for

how to program a User Function Key using Function 35.

5. Yes

MEMORY TRANS .

ENTER NO. OR

OP TI ONS

DES T:

START

6. Either:

❐ Dial more numbers: go to step 4.

❐ Start the transmission: Start

Note: If the other party has not had a G4 Terminal ID programmed, you will see

" =" on the screen during transmission, instead of their ID.

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Storing a Telephone Number

The following example shows how to store a Quick Dial if the ISDN G4 Option

Type 90 has been installed. The differences between this procedure and the

procedure for the base machine (refer to page 31) are as follows:

❐ You have to select G3 or G4 before you input a Quick Dial or Speed Dial

❐ You may have to input a subaddress for a G4 number if the destination has one.

1. Function

QUI CK DI AL

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

❐ At this time, you can print a Quick Dial

List if you press

→

Start .

TO CANCEL

2. Press the Quick Dial Key that you wish

to program.

QUI CK DI AL

ENTER F AX NUMBER

Example: 01 Yes

0 1

< G3 >

TO CANCEL

3. Change the line type (G3/G4) to the cor - QUI CK DI AL

ENTER F AX NUMBER

rect setting by pressing the G4/G3 Se -

0 1

< G4 >

TO CANCEL

lector key on the operation panel.

YES

CLR

4. Enter the telephone number at the op -

eration panel’s ten key pad.

QUI CK DI AL

0 1 < G4 >

7 0 0 5 5 5 1 2 3 4

G3 numbers - If your machine is behind a PBX, include the PBX access code and a pause

before the number. For an international number, place a pause after the country code.

G4 numbers - If you wish to enter a subaddress, press the User Function Key that you have

already programmed as the subaddress key. Then enter the subaddress.

To enter a subaddress, you must use a User Function Key. See page 163 for

how to program a User Function Key using Function 35.

238

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

5. Yes

QUI CK DI AL

0 1

ENTER LABEL

ABC

6. Either:

❐ Program a label for this number: go to

step 7.

❐ Do not program a label: Yes . Go to

step 8.

7. Input a label using the Quick Dial keys.

QUI CK DI AL

OP TI ON S ETTI NG

Then press Yes .

LABEL I NS ERTI ON

OF F

YES

S ELECT

TO END

8. Switch Label Insertion on or off.

Use the ← and → arrows on the

scroll key to select the required setting.

Then press Yes .

QUI CK DI AL

CHOOS E KEY

P RI NT LI S T

TO CANCEL

9. Either

❐ Program another Quick Dial: go to step 2.

❐ Finish: Function .

Note

The procedure for storing a Speed Dial using Function 32 is exactly similar to that shown

above; it is the same as the procedure for the base machine except that you have to select

G3 or G4 and you may need to input a subaddress.

239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Automatic Fallback from Group 4 Mode to Group 3 Mode

If your machine cannot communicate with the other party using Group 4 mode, it

will try using Group 3 mode. This will allow your machine to send the message

even if you selected Group 4 mode instead of Group 3 mode by mistake.

Terminal ID

Instead of the TTI, a Group 4 communication will transmit a variety of information,

including an identifier known as the Terminal ID, which identifies the other party in

the same way as a TTI.

The contents of the Terminal ID are programmed by a service technician.

The make-up of the Group 3 TTI and the Group 4 Terminal ID is as shown below.

Group 3

Date

TTI

Page No.

Label Insertion

Group 4

Rx Terminal ID

Label Insertion

Tx Terminal ID

Date

Page No.

❐ Date, TTI, Page No., and Label Insertion are transmitted in the data signal,

superimposed on the image.

❐ Receiver (Rx) Terminal ID, Transmitter (Tx) Terminal ID, Date (Group 4), Page

No. (Group 4), are transmitted in the Group 4 handshake signals.

❐ The Receiver and Transmitter Terminal IDs have up to 24 characters. The Date

(Group 4) is in the YY-MM-DD-HH:MM format. The Page No. (Group 4) has up

to 7 characters.

240

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Explanation of the Items in the Group 4 Identifier

Transmitter and Receiver Terminal IDs

The following example shows what happens when the two communicating

terminals are connected to two different ISDNs. Each ISDN has its own country

code.

ISDNs

Transmitter

International Link

Receiver

Country Code: 44

Terminal ID:

Country Code: 1

Terminal ID:

LDN/081-890-5566

N.J./201-555-8310

At the top of the received page, the following will be seen.

1 - 2015558310 = N.J./44 - 818905566 = LDN/(Date)/(Page No.)

The zero in the London area code and the other pauses in the phone numbers

are not represented on the printout.

The country code and terminal ID are programmed by the service technician at

installation.

Date and Time

The date and time in the receiving machine are printed.

Page Number

001-001 (File number followed by page number)

Example: Batch Transmission

Receiving a three-page file and a two-page file

First page: 001-001

Second page: 001-002

Third page: 001-003

Fourth page: 002-001

Fifth page: 002-002

241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Switching the Command Information Line On/Off

This is similar to the TTI On/Off switching option for Group 3 Transmission (see

page 64).

The Command Information Line consists or the Receiver and Transmitter Terminal

IDs, the Date and Time, and the Page Number. Normally, this line is printed at the

top of each of the pages you transmit when they are received at the other end.

The top of the image will be overprinted if there is no margin at the top of the

transmitted page.

In some cases, you may wish the other party to receive an unmarked copy of your

original. In this case, you can switch the Command Information Line off.

Note: If you switch the Command Information Line off, make sure that Label In -

sertion is also off if you want the image received at the other end to be un -

marked.

To switch this feature on or off, do the following. (See page 10 if you need more

information about the User Parameter settings adjustment procedure).

1. Function

US ER P ARAMETER

P RI NT LI S T

DEF AULT:

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

YES

S WI TCH0 0 :

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

TO END

2. The settings for switch 00 are now

shown on the bottom line of the display.

3. Press ↓ until the settings for switch 01

are shown.

The setting you need to use is digit 5.

Digit 5

0: This feature is Off.

1: This feature is On.

4. If you wish to change the setting, press 5 .

5. Finish: Yes Function

242

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

APPENDIX C. ISDN G4 OPTION TYPE 90

Terminal ID Verification

This feature helps you to make sure that your communications do not go to the

wrong place. However, like Protection Against Wrong Connections, it will not help

you if you dial the wrong number.

If the Terminal ID of the other party does not match the label stored with the Quick

Dial or Speed Dial that you used to dial the other party with, the communication

will be stopped.

For this function to work:

❐ You must store the destination as a Quick or Speed Dial.

❐ You must make sure that the labels that you program in the Quick/Speed Dials

exactly match the Terminal IDs that are actually stored in the destination fax

machines.

Cross-reference

Terminal ID: see page 240.

Quick Dial: see page 31.

Speed Dial: see page 34.

Troubleshooting

Call Progress Signals (CPS)

Sometimes, a Call Progress Signal and an error message will appear on the

display panel. Possible messages are as follows.

DI ALI NG

The machine is dialing; do not

press Stop.

REMOTE TERMI NAL BUS Y

WRONG NUMBER

Try again later.

Check the number, and check that G3

or G4 was correctly selected.

Then redial.

LI NE NOT AVAI LABLE

F AX NUMBER CHANGED

REMOTE F AX REJ ECTED

UNABLE TO CONNECT

NO RES P ONS E

Try again later.

Find out the new fax number.

Contact the user at the other end.

Try again.

NETWORK BUS Y

Try again later.

CLAS S I NCOMP ATI BLE

The other terminal’s signaling mode

is not compatible with yours, and the

message cannot be sent.

Check that the ISDN line cord is

connected properly. Then try again.

CHECK I NTERF ACE

To remove the message from the display, make sure that the Communicating

indicator is not lit, then press Stop .

243

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GLOSSARY

ADF (Automatic Document Feeder):

A device which feeds the pages of a multipage document one at a time, in the

order that you arranged the pages in the stack.

Batch Numbering (Page Count):

This is a way of numbering pages that allows you to check whether you received

all pages, and if not, which ones are missing. For example, if you receive two

pages with p1/3 printed on one and p2/3 on the other, you have just received a

three-page document but page 3 didn’t make it.

BPS (Bits Per Second):

This is the data communication rate. In G3 mode, your fax terminal digitizes

documents, transforming them into ’bits’ - binary digits - (an average page will

produce about 200,000 of them), and then sends them out at a top speed of

9,600 to 14,400 bps, depending on the model.

Broadcasting:

In G3 fax communication terminology, broadcasting is the transmission of a

document to more than one address in sequence, not simultaneously.

CCITT

Consultative Committee for International Telephone and Telegraph. This

committee sets international standards for communication.

Communication:

Transmission or reception.

Copy:

When used as a noun, this refers to a printout, either in copy mode or receive

mode

Country Code:

In international dialing, this is the code that directs the call to the country where

the terminal that you wish to send to is located.

CSI:

Called Subscriber Identification.

page 25.

☞

Default Setting:

See "Factory Setting".

Dial Pulses:

These are dialing signals that your terminal sends out if it uses pulse dialing (

page 28).

☞

Document:

This is the original page or set of pages that you wish to send.

244

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GLOSSARY

DPI (Dots Per Inch), or l/mm (Lines Per Millimeter):

This is the unit of resolution. The scanner scans your document according to the

selected resolution. An 8-1/2" x 11" page is broken down into about 1,728,000

dots if standard resolution is used. (Digital compression techniques for G3 convert

these into about 200,000 bits.)

ECM (Error Correction Mode): This is signaling method that is designed to

eliminate transmission errors on even the noisiest of telephone lines. See page .

EFC:

This is a proprietary digital data compression technique. It shortens the time for

sending a page.

Factory Setting:

The factory setting of a function is the state into which it was programmed at the

factory; this will also be the state of that function in a new machine. It can also

referred to as "Default Setting".

File:

Memory File, Polling File.

☞

Group 3:

This is an internationally-agreed signaling and data transfer method used for

facsimile communication (approved by CCITT). It is also known as G3.

Handset:

This is the telephone that is connected to the jack marked "TEL 1 or TEL 2".

Home Position:

Some of your machine’s features can be adjusted. The home position is the

setting to which the machine always returns at the end of an operation.

International Dialing Code:

This is the code that must be dialed at the beginning of the number if the

destination is outside your country.

Memory File:

This is a document stored in the SAF memory (see the next page) and the

instructions (destinations, time of transmission) for sending that document.

Modem:

Acronym for modulator/demodulator. A device that transforms a digital signal into

a form suitable for transmission over the telephone network.

Original:

Same as "Document".

Page Retransmission:

If the terminal you are sending to indicates that it did not properly receive the

page you just sent, your terminal will resend that page from memory. This only

works if you used Memory Mode and if you are not using ECM. (ECM is a more

effective data retransmission method.)

245

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GLOSSARY

Polling File:

This is a set of instructions (destinations to be polled, time of polling) for polling

reception.

Pulse Dialing:

This method of dialing uses a string of pulses to represent each dialed digit.

Reception:

The act of receiving a document.

Reduction:

If your document is wider than the paper available in the other terminal, your

terminal will automatically reduce it so that it will fit.

Remote Terminal:

The facsimile terminal that you are sending to or receiving from.

RTI:

Remote Terminal Identification.

page 25.

☞

Sending:

Same as "Transmission", see below.

Standby Mode:

The terminal is said to be in standby mode when it is idle.

Terminal:

A facsimile terminal, such as your machine.

Tone Dialing:

This method of dialing uses a tone to represent each dialed digit.

Transmission:

The act of sending a document.

TTI:

Transmit Terminal Identification.

page 25.

☞

246

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Correcting Mistakes

Dialing

INDEX

8, 52 - 53

Erasing a file from memory 161

Input

Add Paper Indicator

Add Toner Indicator

AI Redial

194

195 - 198

184

132

Wrong Function Number

Counters

Listed on reports

Country Code

179

190

243

Making a telephone call

Sending a fax

CPS (Call Progress Signals)

AI Short Protocol

Area Code Prefix

Authorized Reception

CSI (Called Subscriber Identification)

Authorized Reception List 133, 192

On/Off switch

Auto Document

Auto Receive Mode

Auto Reduce

134

106

Date and Time

Daylight Saving Time

Dedicated Transmission Parameters

228

Destination Check

Dialing

Direct Fax Number Entry

Document Feeder

Acceptable originals

Adjustment knob (blue)

Document Jam

Document size, allowable

Document types, allowable

Dual Access

Automatic Group 4 to Group 3 Fallback

240

50, 51

Batch Transmission

Broadcasting

Using an OMR Sheet

Buzzer

124

172

45 - 46

214

213 - 214

182

Alarm

Volume Control

Call Progress Signals (CPS)

Center Mark, on/off

Chain Dialing

243

147

116

148

215 - 217

53, 213

ECM (Error Correction Mode) 123

Economy Transmission

Economy Transmission Time 67

Erasing a Memory File

Error Codes

Error Report

Checkered Mark, on/off

Clear Copy Indicator

Clear Original indicator

Clock

161

225 - 226

185, 189, 225 - 226

Closed Network

Reception

Transmission

Command Information Line (CIL), on/off

242

Communication Failure Report 185

Communication Result Display 179

Confidential File Indicator

Confidential File Report

On/Off Switch

Confidential ID

Confidential ID Override Option 105

Confidential Reception

Confidential Transmission

Continuous Polling Reception 159

Contrast

Copy Jam

Copy Mode: Multi-copy

Copy paper

152

121

Faxing, basic procedure

File List

190 - 191

File Retention Time

0 hr/24 hr/72 hr selection switch

160

File Retransmission

Forwarding

160

127

128, 186

128

134, 224

136, 193

140

164

Forwarding List

Forwarding Mark, on/off

On/Off switch

127

Function Programs

126

104

Grounding

192

92 - 93

215 - 217

181

200

Group Dial List

Group Transfer Station

How to use

Programming

Changing the size

Copy Paper Replacement

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Groups

Programming

Memory Storage Report

On/Off switch

185

187

Programming by OMR Sheet

Using a Group

171

51, 86

Memory Transmission

Multi-sort Document Reception 146

48, 69

Multi-step Transfer

Multicopy Mode

82, 93

181

Halftone

Halftone Type Selection

Handset

Installation

22, 78

22, 28

Next Transfer Station

How to use

Programming

235

ID Codes

Confidential ID

ID Code

104, 127

OMR Sheets

On Hook Dial

On/Off Switches

Authorized Reception

Auto Reduce

Center Mark

Checkered Mark

166

77, 79

134

ID Code, use with ID Transmission

ID Code, use with Polling Reception

159

147

148

ID Code, used with Secure Polling

155

Command Information Line (CIL)

242

ID Code, used with Stored ID Override

Confidential File Report

File Retention Time

Forwarding

Forwarding Mark

Image sample on reports

Memory Lock

Memory Storage Report

Ordering Toner

Polling Clear Report

Polling Reserve Report

Polling Result Report

Power Saver

RDS

Reception Time

Rejection of Messages from

Unidentified Senders

Restricted Access

Reverse Order Printing

128

160

140

188

130

187

197

187

178

183

149

156

ID Code, used with Transfer Request

Memory Lock ID

ID Transmission

Immediate Transmission

Inch-to-millimeter conversion

Indicators

129 - 130

47, 69

182

Add Paper

194

Add Toner

Clear Copy

Clear Original

Confidential File

Line Fail

195 - 198

215 - 217

53, 213

127

53, 218

Receive File

131

113

145

Installation

International dialing

31, 50

Service Report Transmission227

Specified Cassette Selection143

Substitute Reception

Keystroke Programs

TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report)

187

Transfer Request by Tonal Signals

Label Insertion

Language Selection

Length Reduction

Lightning protection

Line Fail Indicator

120

150

14 - 15

53, 218, 221

Transmission Result Report 187

Two-in-one

Ordering Toner

Ozone

151

197

17, 21

Manual Receive Mode

Memory % Display

Memory Lock

Memory Lock ID

On/Off switch

19, 129 - 130, 140, 224

129

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Next Transfer Station

On/Off Switches

Personal Codes

Power Saver

Quick Dial

Quick Dial (ISDN)

RTI (Remote Terminal Identification)

Speaker and Buzzer Volume 80

Specified Cassette Selection141

235

110

177

Page Count

123

Page Retransmission

PBX, dialing from behind

PC Printer Mode

Personal Code List

Personal Codes

Programming

31, 50

180

111, 192

59, 110

110

238

Use with Label Insertion

Use with Restricted Access 113

120

Speed Dial

238

Use with Transmission

Polling

153

Speed Dial (ISDN)

Telephone Directory

Telephone Line Type

TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)

User Function Keys

User Parameters

Using an OMR Sheet

Canceling a Polling Operation

161

Continuous Polling Reception

159

163

170 - 171, 175

Polling Reception

158

157

154

155

Polling Standby Duration

Polling Transmission

Secured Polling

Your Machine’s ISDN Group 3 Number

234

Stored ID Override (Polling Reception)

Your Machine’s ISDN Group 4 Number

159

Stored ID Override (Polling Transmission)

156

233

Your Machine’s Telephone Number

Protection against wrong connections

122

Polling Clear Report

On/Off switch

Polling Confirmation List

Polling Reserve Report

On/Off switch

Polling Result Report

On/Off switch

Power Failure Report

Power Saver

On/Off switch

Power supply

Printing a file from memory

Program List

186

187

186

187

186

187

186

176

178

Quick Dial

Programming

Programming by OMR Sheet

31, 238

170

Using a Quick Dial number 50 - 51

Quick Dial Keys

Quick Dial List

31, 192

162

101, 192

Programming

Area Code Prefix

Authorized Reception

Confidential ID

RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)

133

127

183, 224

Receive File Indicator

Reception

Country Code

CSI (Called Subscriber Identification)

Auto Receive Mode

Confidential Reception

Manual Receive Mode

Mode Selection

126

Date and Time

Daylight Saving Time

Economy Transmission Time67

Substitute Reception

Reception Time, on/off

Redialing

Forwarding

134

149

20, 72

Function Programs

Group Dial

164

Reduction

Group Transfer Station

ID Code

Auto Reduce

Length Reduction

Replacing Copy Paper

Replacing the Stamp

150

194

199

Language Selection

Memory Lock ID

129

Multi-sort Document Reception

146

Replacing the Toner Cassette 195 - 198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reports

Authorized Reception List 133, 192

Communication Failure Report

185

List

142, 193

118

34, 238

170

Specified Image Area

Speed Dial

Programming

Programming by OMR Sheet

Using a Speed Dial number 50 - 51

Confidential File Report

Error Report

File List

Forwarding List

Group Dial List

Memory Storage Report

186

185, 189, 225 - 226

190 - 191

136, 193

192

Speed Dial List

Stamp

Use during transmission

Replacement

Standby Mode

Subaddress

34, 192

19, 71

199

233

185

Memory Storage Report, on/off

187

Personal Code List

Polling Clear Report

111, 192

186

Substitute Reception

On/Off switch

Polling Clear Report, on/off 187

Polling Confirmation List

Polling Reserve Report

187

186

TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report)

Polling Reserve Report, on/off

187

186

Polling Result Report, on/off 187

185, 189, 191

187

On/Off Switch

Telephone Directory

How to use

Programming

Telephone Line Type

Telephoning

Polling Result Report

10, 28

Power Failure Report

Program List

186

101, 192

31, 192

227

Quick Dial List

Service Report

Making a Telephone Call

Specified Cassette Selection List

142, 193

34, 192

TCR (Transaction Confirmation Report)

185, 189, 191

187

186

Phoning and faxing on the same call

Speed Dial List

Receiving a call

Using On Hook Dial

Using the Handset

77, 79

TCR, on/off

Transfer Result Report

Terminal ID

Terminal ID Verification

Tonal Signals

240

243

115

Transmission Deadline Report

187

Toner cartridges

Transmission Result Report 185

Transmission Result Report, on/off

187

Toner Cassette Replacement 195 - 198

Transfer

Multi-step

User Function List

164, 192

Two-step

User Parameter List

Resolution

190, 193

Transfer Request

Using an OMR Sheet

Transfer Result Report

Transfer Station

Your machine as

Transmission

82, 87, 186

173

186

81, 87

Default setting

Restricted Access

On/off switch

110

113

Reverse Order Printing

145

RTI (Remote Terminal Identification)

Basic Procedure

Broadcasting

Chain Dialing

Direct Fax Number Entry

Immediate

Immediate Transmission

ISDN

Memory

Secure Transmission

Tonal Signals

Using AI Redial

Using an OMR Sheet

116

Secure Transmission

Send Later

117

227

184

47, 69

237

48, 69

117

115

172, 174

Sending a Fax

Service Report Transmission

Shift Key

Short Preamble

Speaker Volume

Specified Cassette Selection

On/Off switch

141

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transmission Deadline (TRD) 61

Transmission Deadline Report 187

Transmission mode

Default setting

Transmission Result Report

On/Off Switch

185

187

TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)

TTI On/Off

Two-in-one

151

Two-step Transfer

82, 91

User Function Keys

User Function List

20, 163

164, 192

User Maintenance Procedures 203 - 212

User Parameter List

User Parameters

190, 193

Programming by OMR Sheet

170

Voice Request

67, 80

Volume Control, Speaker & Buzzer

Well Log Transmission

Wild Cards

125

144

Your Machine’s ISDN Group 3 Number

234

Your Machine’s ISDN Group 4 Number

233

Your Machine’s Telephone Number

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OFFICIAL NOTICE TO USERS

USA

FCC Requirements

1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment is a label that contains, among

other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested,

this information must be provided to the telephone company.

2. This equipment uses the following USOC jack: RJ11C

3. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive REN’s

on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas,

the sum of the REN’s should not exceed five (5.0). Contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for

the calling area.

4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that tempo-

rary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the

customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is

necessary.

5. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the

operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to

make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.

6. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication), refer to the solving prob-

lems section in this manual.

7. If you cannot correct the problem, please contact the RICOH CORP. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DEPT. at 1-800-FASTFIX

for repair and warranty information. If it is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request

you to disconnect the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.

8. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is sub-

ject to state tariffs.

WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS

TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS:

1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.

2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.

CANADA

The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the

equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. The department

does not guarantee that the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should

ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must

also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above

conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier.

Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the

telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own

protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe

system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric

inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

The standard connecting arrangement code for this equipment is CA11A or CB-1D.

The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a

telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination of a loop may consist of any

combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the load numbers of all the devices does not exceed

100.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUNCTION LIST

NO.

FUNCTION

PAGE

104

Confidential Transmission

Transfer Request

155, 156

154

Secured Polling Transmission

Free Polling Transmission

Polling Reception

Direct Fax Number Entry

Erasing Memory Files

158

161

160

Erasing Polling Reception Files

Erasing Polling Transmission Files

Retransmitting a Fax Message from Memory

Programming Quick Dial/Printing the Quick Dial List

Programming Speed Dial/Printing the Speed Dial List

Programming Groups/Printing the Group Dial List

Keystroke Programs and Function Programs: Labeling and Erasing

Programming User Function Keys/Printing the User Function Key List

Auto Documents: Labeling and Erasing

Entering Printer Mode

Printing the TCR/On-screen Communication Result Display

Printing the File List

Printing the Quick Dial List

Printing the Speed Dial List

Printing the Group Dial List

Printing the Program List

Printing the User Function List

Printing the Contents of a Memory File

Printing the Contents of a Polling File

Printing an Auto Document

Printing Blank OMR Sheets

Printing a Confidential Message

101, 103

163

107, 109

180

179, 191

191

✬✬✬✬

192

162

108

174

127

130

✬

Printing from Memory Lock

Functions 60 and above can only be used after a password has been entered.

System Set-up: Your Country Code, Your Fax Terminal’s Telephone

Number, ISDN G4 and G3 Telephone Numbers , Your Inter-city

83, 84, 233,

✬✬

234, 84, 235,

85, 127, 129,

95, 26, 26, 27

110, 192

✬✬

Access Code (Area Code Prefix), Next Transfer Station

, ID Code,

✬

Confidential ID , Memory Lock ID , Remote ID, RTI, TTI, CSI

Programming Personal Codes/Printing the Personal Code List

Programming Authorized Reception/Printing the Authorized Reception

List

132, 192

Programming the Economy Transmission Time and the Power Saver

Programming Forwarding/Printing the Forwarding List

67, 176

134, 193

✬

Programming Specified Cassette Selection/Printing the Specified

141, 193

✬✬✬

Cassette Selection List

Programming the Number for Multi-sort Document Reception

✬

146

10, 193

179

118

On/Off Switches

Programming the User Parameters/Printing the User Parameter List

Programming the Date and Time

Adjusting the Speaker and Buzzer Volume

Selecting the Language on the Display and Reports

Checking the Counters

Specified Image Area

✬

✬✬

: Memory card or hard disk required,

: Group 4 kit required

✬✬✬

✬✬✬✬

: At least one optional extra paper feed unit required,

: Printer interface kit required

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Certification Label

RICOH UNITECHNO CO., LTD.

Complies with FDA radiation performance

standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.

713

TSURUGASONE YASHIO-SHI

SAITAMA-KEN JAPAN.

MANUFACTURED:

PPC2100S HS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SUPPLIES

CAUTION: Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that

may result from the use of parts other than recommended parts.

TONER CASSETTES

❐ TONER CASSETTE TYPE 30 is recommended for the best performance.

STAMP

❐ MARKER TYPE 30 is recommended for the best performance.

Headquarters: Ricoh Corporation, 5 Dedrick Place, West Caldwell, NJ 07006. 201-882-2000

U.S. Government Marketing: Ricoh Corporation, 1700 N. Moore Street, Suite 1200, Arlington, VA 22209. 703-525-3234

Ricoh Company Ltd., 15-5, Minami-Aoyama 1-Chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 107, Japan

Part No. H5134302 Printed in Japan

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RCA Projection Television HDTV DVD Monitor User Guide
RCA Satellite TV System TV631 User Guide
RCA VCR VR538 User Guide
Regency Indoor Fireplace E21 LP3 User Guide
Rose electronic Network Card Crystal View User Guide
Ryobi Trimmer RY30000B User Guide
Salton Gas Grill GP160A User Guide
Samson Headphones SP50P User Guide
Samsung Graphics Tablet SGH I467M User Guide
Sears Saw 11319771 User Guide